Toshiba Laptop TECRA P5 User Manual
User’s Manual  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/  
Satellite Pro S200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Back. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Underside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Front with the display open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Optical disc drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
AC adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15  
Chapter 3 Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
TOSHIBA Value Added Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
Utilities and Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Optional devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30  
Chapter 4 Operating Basics  
TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using the Fingerprint Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Using optical disc drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Writing CDs on DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
Media care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
Wireless communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29  
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Computer Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35  
Heat dispersal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
Chapter 5 The Keyboard  
Typewriter keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Function keys: F1 … F12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Soft keys: FN key combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Hot keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Windows special keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Keypad overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Generating ASCII characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Chapter 6 Power and Power-Up Modes  
Power conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Monitoring of power condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
TOSHIBA Password Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Power-up modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Panel power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
System Auto Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Chapter 7 HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
Accessing HW Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
HW Setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
BIOS Setup Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8  
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting  
Problem solving process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Hardware and system checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
TOSHIBA support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24  
Appendix A Specifications  
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Appendix B Display Controller and Video mode  
Display controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Video mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Appendix C AT Commands  
Appendix D S-registers  
S-register values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1  
AT command set result codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
Appendix E V.90  
V.90 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1  
AT Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3  
Appendix F Wireless LAN  
Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1  
Radio Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2  
Supported Frequency Sub-bands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2  
Appendix G Intel® Matrix Storage Manager  
Manually Setting up Windows (Windows Vista™). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1  
Manually Setting up Windows Manually (Windows XP) . . . . . . . . . . G-2  
How to install Intel® Matrix Storage Manager on Windows XP or  
Windows Vista™: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3  
Appendix H Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Bluetooth wireless technology and your Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3  
Regulatory statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3  
Using Bluetooth® Adaptor from TOSHIBA equipment in Japan . . . H-6  
Appendix I AC Power Cord and Connectors  
Certification agencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1  
Appendix J TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer  
Appendix K Legal Footnotes  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Non-applicable Icons*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1  
CPU*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1  
Memory (Main System)*3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2  
Battery Life*4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3  
LCD*6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3  
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3  
Wireless LAN*8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4  
Copy Protection*9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4  
Images*10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4  
Glossary  
Index  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Copyright  
© 2007 by TOSHIBA Corporation. All rights reserved. Under the copyright  
laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior  
written permission of TOSHIBA. No patent liability is assumed, with respect  
to the use of the information contained herein.  
TOSHIBA TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200 Portable  
Personal Computer User’s Manual  
First edition May 2007  
Copyright authority for music, movies, computer programs, databases and  
other intellectual property covered by copyright laws belongs to the author  
or to the copyright owner. Copyrighted material can be reproduced only for  
personal use or use within the home. Any other use beyond that stipulated  
above (including conversion to digital format, alteration, transfer of copied  
material and distribution on a network) without the permission of the  
copyright owner is a violation of copyright or author's rights and is subject to  
civil damages or criminal action. Please comply with copyright laws in  
making any reproduction from this manual.  
Disclaimer  
This manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy. The  
instructions and descriptions it contains are accurate for the TOSHIBA  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200 Portable Personal  
Computer at the time of this manual’s production. However, succeeding  
computers and manuals are subject to change without notice. TOSHIBA  
assumes no liability for damages incurred directly or indirectly from errors,  
omissions or discrepancies between the computer and the manual.  
Trademarks  
IBM is a registered trademark and IBM PC is a trademark of International  
Business Machines Corporation.  
Intel, Intel SpeedStep, Intel Core, Centrino and Celeron are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.  
Windows and Microsoft are registered trademarks and Windows Vista is a  
trademark of Microsoft Corporation.  
Bluetooth is a trademark or registered trademark owned by its proprietor  
and used by TOSHIBA under license.  
InterVideo and WinDVD are registered trademarks of InterVideo Inc.  
Photo CD is a trademark of Eastman Kodak.  
i.LINK is trademark and registered trademark of Sony Corporation.  
Other trademarks and registered trademarks not listed above may be used  
in this manual.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
     
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
FCC information  
FCC notice "Declaration of Conformity Information"  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits  
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference  
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
■ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
■ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits may be attached to  
this equipment. Operation with non-compliant peripherals or peripherals  
not recommended by TOSHIBA is likely to result in interference to radio  
and TV reception. Shielded cables must be used between the external  
devices and the computer’s external monitor port, Universal Serial Bus  
(USB 2.0) ports, i.LINK (IEEE1394) port, serial port and microphone jack.  
Changes or modifications made to this equipment, not expressly approved  
by TOSHIBA or parties authorized by TOSHIBA could void the user’s  
authority to operate the equipment.  
FCC conditions  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Contact  
Address:  
TOSHIBA America Information Systems, Inc.  
9740 Irvine Boulevard  
Irvine, California 92618-1697  
Telephone: (949) 583-3000  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
 
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
EU Declaration of Conformity  
TOSHIBA declares, that this product conforms to the following Standards:  
Supplementary  
Information:  
“The product complies with the requirements of  
the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, the EMC  
Directive 89/336/EEC and/or the R&TTE  
Directive 1999/5/EC.”  
This product is carrying the CE-Mark in accordance with the related  
European Directives. The party responsible for CE-Marking is TOSHIBA  
Europe GmbH, Hammfelddamm 8, 41460 Neuss, Germany.  
VCCI Class B Information  
How to confirm Modem Module Label  
The modem module is located next to memory slots. To confirm the  
modem’s label, refer to "Installing a memory module (Slot A and Slot B)" in  
this manual.  
Modem warning notice  
Conformity Statement  
The equipment has been approved to [Commission Decision "CTR21"] for  
pan-European single terminal connection to the Public Switched Telephone  
Network (PSTN).  
However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in  
different countries/regions the approval does not, of itself, give an  
unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network  
termination point.  
In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the  
first instance.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii  
       
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Network Compatibility Statement  
This product is designed to work with, and is compatible with the following  
networks. It has been tested to and found to conform with the additional  
requirements conditional in EG 201 121.  
Germany  
ATAAB AN005,AN006,AN007,AN009,AN010 and  
DE03,04,05,08,09,12,14,17  
Greece  
ATAAB AN005,AN006 and GR01,02,03,04  
ATAAB AN001,005,006,007,011 and P03,04,08,10  
ATAAB AN005,007,012, and ES01  
ATAAB AN002  
Portugal  
Spain  
Switzerland  
All other countries/regions ATAAB AN003,004  
Specific switch settings or software setup are required for each network,  
please refer to the relevant sections of the user guide for more details.  
The hookflash (timed break register recall) function is subject to separate  
national type approvals. It has not been tested for conformity to national  
type regulations, and no guarantee of successful operation of that specific  
function on specific national networks can be given.  
Japan regulations  
Region selection  
If you are using the computer in Japan, technical regulations described in  
the Telecommunications Business Law require that you select the Japan  
region mode. It is illegal to use the modem in Japan with any other  
selection.  
Redial  
Up to two redial attempts can be made. If more than two redial attempts are  
made, the modem will return Black Listed. If you are experiencing  
problems with the Black Listed code, set the interval between redials at one  
minute or longer.  
Japan’s Telecommunications Business Law permits up to two redials on  
analogue telephones, but the redials must be made within a total of three  
minutes.  
The internal modem is approved by Japan Approvals Institute for  
Telecommunications Equipment.  
A04-0609001 or A05-0413001  
User’s Manual  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Pursuant to FCC CFR 47, Part 68:  
When you are ready to install or use the modem, call your local telephone  
company and give them the following information:  
■ The telephone number of the line to which you will connect the modem  
■ The registration number that is located on the device  
The FCC registration number of the modem will be found on either the  
device which is to be installed, or, if already installed, on the bottom of the  
computer outside of the main system label.  
■ The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary.  
For the REN of your modem, refer to your modem’s label.  
The modem connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack  
called the USOC RJ11C.  
Type of service  
Your modem is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines.  
Connection to telephone company-provided coin service (central office  
implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is  
subject to state tariffs. If you have any questions about your telephone line,  
such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the  
telephone company will provide this information upon request.  
Telephone company procedures  
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it  
can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make  
changes in their equipment, operations, or procedures. If these changes  
might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone  
company will give you notice in writing to allow you to make any changes  
necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If problems arise  
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should  
immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to  
the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they  
may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in  
advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be  
notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will be given the  
opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a  
complaint with the FCC. In the event repairs are ever needed on your  
modem, they should be performed by TOSHIBA Corporation or an  
authorized representative of TOSHIBA Corporation.  
Disconnection  
If you should ever decide to permanently disconnect your modem from its  
present line, please call the telephone company and let them know of this  
change.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Fax branding  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any  
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message  
via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a  
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of  
the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the  
business, other entity or individual sending the message and the telephone  
number of the sending machine or such business, other entity or individual.  
In order to program this information into your fax modem, you should  
complete the setup of your fax software before sending messages.  
Instructions for IC CS-03 certified equipment  
1. The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This  
certification means that the equipment meets certain  
telecommunications network protective, operational and safety  
requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment  
Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not  
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is  
permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local  
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed  
using an acceptable method of connection.  
The customer should be aware that compliance with the above  
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a  
representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations  
made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may  
give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to  
disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground  
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic  
water pipe systems, if present, are connected together. This precaution  
may be particularly important in rural areas.  
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but  
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician,  
as appropriate.  
2. The user manual of analog equipment must contain the equipment’s  
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) and an explanation notice similar to  
the following:  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary.  
For the REN of your modem, refer to your modem’s label.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xi  
 
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device  
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be  
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may  
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that  
the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not  
exceed 5.  
3. The standard connecting arrangement (telephone jack type) for this  
equipment is jack type(s): USOC RJ11C.  
The IC registration number of the modem is shown below.  
Canada: 4005B-ATHENS or 4005B-DELPHI  
Notes for Users in Australia and New Zealand  
Modem warning notice for Australia  
Modems connected to the Australian telecoms network must have a valid  
Austel permit. This modem has been designed to specifically configure to  
ensure compliance with Austel standards when the country/region selection  
is set to Australia. The use of other country/region setting while the modem  
is attached to the Australian PSTN would result in you modem being  
operated in a non-compliant manner. To verify that the country/region is  
correctly set, enter the command ATI which displays the currently active  
setting.  
To set the country/region permanently to Australia, enter the following  
command sequence:  
AT%TE=1  
ATS133=1  
AT&F  
AT&W  
AT%TE=0  
ATZ  
Failure to set the modem to the Australia country/region setting as shown  
above will result in the modem being operated in a non-compliant manner.  
Consequently, there would be no permit in force for this equipment and the  
Telecoms Act 1991 prescribes a penalty of $12,000 for the connection of  
non-permitted equipment.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii  
 
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Notes for use of this device in New Zealand  
■ The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom  
acceptance of responsibility for the correct operation of that device  
under all operating conditions. In particular the higher speeds at which  
this modem is capable of operating depend on a specific network  
implementation which is only one of many ways of delivering high  
quality voice telephony to customers. Failure to operate should not be  
reported as a fault to Telecom.  
■ In addition to satisfactory line conditions a modem can only work  
properly if:  
a/ it is compatible with the modem at the other end of the call and.  
b/ the application using the modem is compatible with the application  
at the other end of the call - e.g., accessing the Internet requires  
suitable software in addition to a modem.  
■ This equipment shall not be used in any manner which could constitute  
a nuisance to other Telecom customers.  
■ Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom’s PTC  
Specifications are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with  
this modem. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within  
the following limits for compliance with Telecom Specifications:  
a/ There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number  
within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and  
b/ The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30  
seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the  
next.  
c/ Automatic calls to different numbers shall be not less than 5  
seconds apart.  
■ Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically  
damaged, and arrange for its disposal or repair.  
■ The correct settings for use with this modem in New Zealand are as  
follows:  
ATB0 (CCITT operation)  
AT&G2 (1800 Hz guard tone)  
AT&P1 (Decadic dialing make-break ratio =33%/67%)  
ATS0=0 (not auto answer)  
ATS6=4 (Blind dial delay)  
ATS7=less than 90 (Time to wait to carrier after dialing)  
ATS10=less than 150 (loss of carrier to hangup delay, factory  
default of 15 recommended)  
ATS11=90 (DTMF dialing on/off duration=90 ms)  
ATX2 (Dial tone detect, but not (U.S.A.) call progress detect)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiii  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
■ When used in the Auto Answer mode, the S0 register must be set with a  
value of 3 or 4. This ensures:  
■ a person calling your modem will hear a short burst of ringing before  
the modem answers. This confirms that the call has been  
successfully switched through the network.  
■ caller identification information (which occurs between the first and  
second ring cadences) is not destroyed.  
■ The preferred method of dialing is to use DTMF tones (ATDT...) as this  
is faster and more reliable than pulse (decadic) dialing. If for some  
reason you must use decadic dialing, your communications program  
must be set up to record numbers using the following translation table  
as this modem does not implement the New Zealand “Reverse Dialing”  
standard.  
Number to be dialed: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
Number to program into computer: 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1  
Note that where DTMF dialing is used, the numbers should be  
entered normally.  
■ The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of  
this there may be circumstances where the performance is less than  
optimal. Before reporting such occurrences as faults, please check the  
line with a standard Telepermitted telephone, and only report a fault if  
the phone performance is impaired.  
■ It is recommended that this equipment be disconnected from the  
Telecom line during electrical storms.  
■ When relocating the equipment, always disconnect the Telecom line  
connection before the power connection, and reconnect the power first.  
■ This equipment may not be compatible with Telecom Distinctive Alert  
cadences and services such as FaxAbility.  
NOTE THAT FAULT CALLOUTS CAUSED BY ANY OF THE ABOVE  
CAUSES MAY INCUR A CHARGE FROM TELECOM  
General conditions  
As required by PTC 100, please ensure that this office is advised of any  
changes to the specifications of these products which might affect  
compliance with the relevant PTC Specifications.  
The grant of this Telepermit is specific to the above products with the  
marketing description as stated on the Telepermit label artwork. The  
Telepermit may not be assigned to other parties or other products without  
Telecom approval.  
A Telepermit artwork for each device is included from which you may  
prepare any number of Telepermit labels subject to the general instructions  
on format, size and color on the attached sheet.  
The Telepermit label must be displayed on the product at all times as proof  
to purchasers and service personnel that the product is able to be  
legitimately connected to the Telecom network.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiv  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
The Telepermit label may also be shown on the packaging of the product  
and in the sales literature, as required in PTC 100.  
The charge for a Telepermit assessment is $337.50. An additional charge  
of $337.50 is payable where an assessment is based on reports against  
non-Telecom New Zealand Specifications. $112.50 is charged for each  
variation when submitted at the same time as the original.  
An invoice for $NZ1237.50 will be sent under separate cover.  
Following information is only for EU-member states:  
The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as  
household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will  
help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and  
human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste  
handling of this product. For more detailed information about recycling of  
this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste  
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.  
This symbol may not stick depending on the country and region where you  
purchased.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xv  
 
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Optical disc drive safety instructions  
Be sure to check the international precautions at the end of this section.  
Panasonic  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW UJDA780  
■ The DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive employs a laser system. To ensure  
proper use of this product, please read this instruction manual carefully  
and retain for future reference. Should the unit ever require  
maintenance, contact an authorized service location.  
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other  
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvi  
 
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
DVD Super Multi with Double Layer Recording UJ-860  
■ The DVD Super Multi drive with Double Layer Recording model  
employs a laser system. To ensure proper use of this product, please  
read this instruction manual carefully and retain for future reference.  
Should the unit ever require maintenance, contact an authorized  
service location.  
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other  
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvii  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
TEAC  
CD-ROM CD-224E  
■ The CD-ROM drive employs a laser system. To ensure proper use of  
this product, please read this instruction manual carefully and retain for  
future reference. Should the unit ever require maintenance, contact an  
authorized service location.  
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other  
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
SERIAL NO.  
MANUFATURED:  
THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR  
1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR  
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER  
NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001.  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASER KLASSE 1  
TEAC Corporation  
3-7-3 Naka-cho, Musashino-shi,  
Tokyo, Japan  
User’s Manual  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive DW-224E  
■ The DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive employs a laser system. To ensure  
proper use of this product, please read this instruction manual carefully  
and retain for future reference. Should the unit ever require  
maintenance, contact an authorized service location.  
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other  
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
SERIAL NO.  
MANUFATURED:  
THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR  
1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR  
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER  
NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001.  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASER KLASSE 1  
TEAC Corporation  
3-7-3 Naka-cho, Musashino-shi,  
Tokyo, Japan  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xix  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
DVD Super Multi with Double Layer Recording DV-W28EC  
■ The DVD Super Multi drive with Double Layer Recording model  
employs a laser system. To ensure proper use of this product, please  
read this instruction manual carefully and retain for future reference.  
Should the unit ever require maintenance, contact an authorized  
service location.  
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other  
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
SERIAL NO.  
MANUFATURED:  
THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR  
1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR  
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER  
NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001.  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASER KLASSE 1  
TEAC Corporation  
3-7-3 Naka-cho, Musashino-shi,  
Tokyo, Japan  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xx  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
International precautions  
CAUTION: This appliance contains a  
laser system and is classified as a  
“CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.” To use  
this model properly, read the instruction  
manual carefully and keep this manual  
for your future reference. In case of any  
trouble with this model, please contact  
your nearest “AUTHORIZED service  
station.” To prevent direct exposure to the  
laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
VORSICHT: Dieses Gerät enthält ein  
Laser-System und ist als  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1  
PRODUKT  
“LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT”  
klassifiziert. Für den richtigen Gebrauch  
dieses Modells lesen Sie bitte die  
Bedienungsanleitung sorgfältig durch  
und bewahren diese bitte als Referenz  
auf. Falls Probleme mit diesem Modell  
auftreten, benachrichtigen Sie bitte die  
nächste “autorisierte Service-Vertretung”.  
Um einen direkten Kontakt mit dem  
Laserstrahl zu vermeiden darf das Gerät  
nicht geöffnet werden.  
TO EN 60825-1  
ADVARSEL: Denne mærking er anbragt  
udvendigt på apparatet og indikerer, at  
apparatet arbejder med laserstråler af  
klasse 1, hviket betyder, at der anvendes  
laserstrlier af svageste klasse, og at man  
ikke på apparatets yderside kan bilve  
udsat for utilladellg kraftig stråling.  
ADVERSEL:USYNLIG  
LASERSTRÅLING VED  
ÅBNING, NÅR  
SIKKERHEDSAF-BRYDER  
ER UDE AF FUNKTION.  
UNDGÅ UDSÆTTSLSE  
FOR STRÅLING  
APPARATET BOR KUN ÅBNES AF  
FAGFOLK MED SÆRLIGT KENDSKAB  
TIL APPARATER MED  
LASERSTRÅLER!  
Indvendigt i apparatet er anbragt den her  
gengivne advarselsmækning, som  
advarer imod at foretage sådanne  
indgreb i apparatet, at man kan komme til  
at udsatte sig for laserstråling.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxi  
 
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
OBS! Apparaten innehåller  
laserkomponent som avger laserstråining  
överstigande gränsen för laserklass 1.  
VAROITUS. Suojakoteloa si saa avata.  
Laite sisältää laserdiodin, joka lähetää  
näkymätöntä silmilie vaarallista  
lasersäteilyä.  
CAUTION: USE OF CONTROLS OR  
ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE  
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN  
THOSE SPECIFIED IN THE OWNER’S  
MANUAL MAY RESULT IN  
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.  
VORSICHT: DIE VERWENDUNG VON  
ANDEREN STEURUNGEN ODER  
EINSTELLUNGEN ODER DAS  
DURCHFÜHREN VON ANDEREN  
VORGÄNGEN ALS IN DER  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
BESCHRIEBEN KÖNNEN  
GEFÄHRLICHE  
STRAHLENEXPOSITIONEN ZUR  
FOLGE HABEN.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxii  
Preface  
Congratulations on your purchase of the TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA  
P5/ Satellite Pro S200 series computer. This powerful notebook computer  
provides excellent expansion capability, includes multimedia functionality,  
and is designed to provide years of reliable, high-performance computing.  
This manual tells how to set up and begin using your TECRA A9/ TECRA  
S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200 computer. It also provides detailed  
information on configuring your computer, basic operations and care, using  
optional devices and troubleshooting.  
If you are a new user of computers or if you’re new to portable computing,  
first read over the Chapter 1, Getting Started and Chapter 3, Hardware,  
Utilities and Options chapters to familiarize yourself with the computer’s  
features, components and accessory devices. Then read Chapter 1,  
Getting Started for step-by-step instructions on setting up your computer.  
If you are an experienced computer user, please continue reading the  
preface to learn how this manual is organized, then become acquainted  
with this manual by browsing through its pages. Be sure to read the Special  
features section in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options to learn  
about features that are uncommon or unique to this computer, as well as  
the section on Chapter 7, HW Setup & BIOS Setup, to understand how to  
setup and configure these features.  
Read Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options if connecting optional  
products or external devices.  
Conventions  
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight  
terms and operating procedures.  
Abbreviations  
On first appearance, and whenever necessary for clarity, abbreviations are  
enclosed in parentheses following their definition. For example: Read Only  
Memory (ROM). Acronyms are also defined in the Glossary.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxiii  
   
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Icons  
Keys  
Icons identify ports, dials, and other parts of your computer. The indicator  
panel also uses icons to identify the components it is providing information  
on.  
The keyboard keys are used in the text to describe many computer  
operations. A distinctive typeface identifies the key top symbols as they  
appear on the keyboard. For example, ENTER identifies the ENTER key.  
Key operation  
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We  
identify such operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus sign  
(+). For example, CTRL + C means you must hold down CTRL and at the  
same time press C. If three keys are used, hold down the first two and at  
the same time press the third.  
When procedures require an action such as  
ABC  
clicking an icon or entering text, the icon's name  
or the text you are to type in is represented in the  
typeface you see to the left.  
Display  
Names of windows or icons or text generated by  
the computer that appear on its display screen  
are presented in the type face you see to the left.  
S
ABC  
Messages  
Messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your  
attention. Each type of message is identified as shown below.  
Pay attention! A caution informs you that improper use of equipment or  
failure to follow instructions may cause data loss or damage your  
equipment.  
Please read. A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best use of  
your equipment.  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in death or  
serious injury, if you do not follow instructions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxiv  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Terminology  
This term is defined in this document as follows:  
Start The word "Start" refers to the "  
" button in  
Microsoft® Windows VistaTM  
.
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxv  
General Precautions  
TOSHIBA computers are designed to optimize safety, minimize strain and  
withstand the rigors of portability. However, certain precautions should be  
observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the  
computer.  
Be certain to read the general precautions below and to note the cautions  
included in the text of the manual.  
Creating a computer-friendly environment  
Place the computer on a flat surface that is large enough for the computer  
and any other items you are using, such as a printer.  
Leave enough space around the computer and other equipment to provide  
adequate ventilation. Otherwise, they may overheat.  
To keep your computer in prime operating condition, protect your work area  
from:  
■ Dust, moisture, and direct sunlight.  
■ Equipment that generates a strong electromagnetic field, such as  
stereo speakers (other than speakers that are connected to the  
computer) or speakerphones.  
■ Rapid changes in temperature or humidity and sources of temperature  
change such as air conditioner vents or heaters.  
■ Extreme heat, cold, or humidity.  
■ Liquids and corrosive chemicals.  
Stress injury  
Carefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. It contains  
information on the prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists  
that can be caused by extensive keyboard use. Instruction Manual for  
Safety and Comfort also includes information on work space design,  
posture and lighting that can help reduce physical stress.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxvi  
     
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Heat injury  
■ Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer. If the computer is  
used for long periods, its surface can become very warm. While the  
temperature will not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical  
contact with the computer for a long time, for example if you rest the  
computer on your lap or if you keep your hands on the palm rest, your  
skin might suffer a low-heat injury.  
■ If the computer has been used for a long time, avoid direct contact with  
the metal plate supporting the various interface ports as this can  
become hot.  
■ The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use but this  
condition does not indicate a malfunction. If you need to transport the  
AC adaptor, you should disconnect it and let it cool before moving it.  
■ Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat as the  
material could become damaged.  
Pressure or impact damage  
Do not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to any form of  
strong impact as this can damage the computer's components or otherwise  
cause it to malfunction.  
PC Card overheating  
Some PC Cards can become hot during prolonged use which may result in  
errors or instability in the operation of the device in question. In addition,  
you should also be careful when you remove a PC Card that has been  
used for a long time.  
Mobile phones  
Please be aware that the use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio  
system. The operation of the computer will not be impaired in any way, but  
it is recommended that a minimum distance of 30cm is maintained between  
the computer and a mobile phone that is in use.  
Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort  
All important information on the safe and proper use of this computer is  
described in the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. Be  
sure to read it before using the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxvii  
         
Chapter 1  
Getting Started  
This chapter provides an equipment checklist, and basic information to start  
using your computer.  
Some of the features described in this manual may not function properly if  
you use an operating system that was not pre-installed by TOSHIBA.  
Equipment checklist  
Carefully unpack your computer, taking care to save the box and packaging  
materials for future use.  
Hardware  
Check to make sure you have all the following items:  
■ TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200 Portable  
Personal Computer  
■ AC adaptor and power cord (2-pin plug or 3-pin plug)  
■ Battery pack  
■ USB floppy diskette drive (Is included with some models)  
■ Spare AccuPoint (pointing device) cap (Is included with some models)  
Documentation  
■ TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200 Portable  
Personal Computer User's Manual  
■ Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort  
■ End User License Agreement  
If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact your dealer  
immediately.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1  
           
Getting Started  
Software  
The following Windows® operating system and utility software are pre-  
installed.  
■ Microsoft® Windows VistaTM  
■ TOSHIBA Value Added Package  
■ Recovery Disc Creator  
■ DVD Video Player  
■ TOSHIBA SD Memory Utilities  
■ TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility  
■ CD/DVD Drive Acoustic Silencer  
■ TOSHIBA Assist  
■ TOSHIBA ConfigFree  
■ TOSHIBA HDD Protection  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
■ Fingerprint Utility (Is installed in some models)  
■ Windows Mobility Center  
■ Online Manual  
■ TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200 User's  
Manual (This manual)  
■ Discs  
■ Windows Anytime Upgrade DVD (Is included with some models)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-2  
Getting Started  
Getting Started  
■ All users should be sure to read the section Starting up for the first time.  
■ Be sure to read the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort  
for information on the safe and proper use of this computer. It is  
intended to help you be more comfortable and productive while using a  
notebook computer. By following the recommendations in it you may  
reduce your chance of developing a painful or disabling injury to your  
hand, arms, shoulders or neck.  
This section provides basic information to start using your computer. It  
covers the following topics:  
■ Connecting the AC adaptor  
■ Opening the display  
■ Turning on the power  
■ Starting up for the first time  
■ Turning off the power  
■ Restarting the computer  
■ System Recovery Options  
■ Creating Optical Recovery Discs  
■ Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery hard disk drive  
■ Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery Discs  
■ Use a virus-check program and make sure it is updated regularly.  
■ Never format storage media without checking its content - formatting  
destroys all stored data.  
■ It is a good idea to periodically back up the internal hard disk drive or  
other main storage device to external media. General storage media is  
not durable or stable over long periods of time and under certain  
conditions may result in data loss.  
■ Before you install a device or application, save any data in memory to  
the hard disk drive or other storage media. Failure to do so may result  
in the loss of data.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3  
   
Getting Started  
Connecting the AC adaptor  
Attach the AC adaptor when you need to charge the battery or you want to  
operate from AC power. It is also the fastest way to get started, because  
the battery pack will need to be charged before you can operate from  
battery power.  
The AC adaptor can be connected to any power source supplying from 100  
to 240 volts and 50 or 60 hertz. For details on using the AC adaptor to  
charge the battery pack, refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.  
■ Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was provided with your PC  
and the TOSHIBA Battery Charger (that may have been provided with  
your PC), or use TOSHIBA recommended alternate models to avoid  
any risk of fire or other damage to the PC. Use of an incompatible AC  
adaptor or Battery Charger could cause fire or damage to the PC  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ Never plug the AC adaptor or Battery Charger into a power source that  
does not correspond to both the voltage and the frequency specified on  
the regulatory label of the unit. Failure to do so could result in a fire or  
electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ Always use or purchase power cables that comply with the legal  
voltage and frequency specifications and requirements in the country of  
use. Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock, possibly  
resulting in serious injury.  
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in  
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside this  
region. For use in other regions, please buy power cords that conform  
to safety rules and regulations in the particular region.  
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.  
■ When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer, always follow the  
steps in the exact order as described in the User’s Manual. Connecting  
the power cable to a live electrical outlet should be the last step  
otherwise the adaptor DC output plug could hold an electrical charge  
and cause an electrical shock or minor bodily injury when touched. As  
a general safety precaution, avoid touching any metal parts.  
■ Never place your computer or AC adaptor on a wooden surface,  
furniture, or any other surface that could be marred by exposure to heat  
since the computer base and AC adaptor's surface increase in  
temperature during normal use.  
■ Always place your computer or AC adaptor on a flat and hard surface  
that is resistant to heat damage.  
Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for  
detailed precautions and handling instructions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-4  
 
Getting Started  
1. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor.  
Figure 1-1 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (2-pin plug)  
Figure 1-2 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (3-pin plug)  
Either a 2-pin or 3-pin adaptor/cord will be included with the computer  
depending on the model.  
2. Connect the AC adaptor’s DC output plug to the DC IN 15V jack on the  
back of the computer.  
DC IN 15V jack  
Figure 1-3 Connecting the adaptor to the computer  
3. Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet - the Battery and DC IN  
indicators on the front of the computer should glow.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-5  
Getting Started  
Opening the display  
The display panel can be opened to a wide range of angles for optimal  
viewing.  
1. Slide the display latch on the front of the computer to unlatch the  
display panel.  
2. While holding down the palm rest with one hand so that the main body  
of the computer is not raised, slowly lift the display panel - this will allow  
the angle of the display panel to be adjusted to provide optimum clarity.  
Display panel  
Display latch  
Figure 1-4 Opening the display panel  
Use reasonable care when opening and closing the display panel. Opening  
it vigorously or slamming it shut could damage the computer.  
■ Be careful not to open the display panel too far as this could put stress  
on the display panel’s hinges and cause damage.  
■ Do not press or push on the display panel.  
■ Do not lift the computer by the display panel.  
■ Do not close the display panel with pens or any other objects left in  
between the display panel and the keyboard.  
■ When opening or closing the display panel, place one hand on the  
palm rest to hold the computer in place and use the other hand to  
slowly open or close the display panel (Do not use excessive force  
when opening or closing the display panel).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-6  
 
Getting Started  
Turning on the power  
This section describes how to turn on the power - the Power indicator will  
then indicate the status. Please refer to the Monitoring of power condition  
section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for more information.  
■ After you turn on the power for the first time, do not turn it off until you  
have set up the operating system. Please refer to the section Starting  
up for the first time for more information.  
■ Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows Setup.  
1. Open the display panel.  
2. Press and hold the computer's power button for two or three seconds.  
Power button  
Figure 1-5 Turning on the power  
Starting up for the first time  
The Microsoft Windows VistaTM Startup Screen will be the first screen  
displayed when you turn on the power. Follow the on-screen instructions on  
each screen in order to properly install the operating system.  
When it is displayed, be sure to read the Software License Terms  
carefully.  
Turning off the power  
The power can be turned off in one of three modes, either Shut Down  
(Boot) Mode, Hibernation Mode or Sleep Mode.  
Shut Down mode (Boot Mode)  
When you turn off the power in Shut Down Mode no data will be saved and  
the computer will boot to the operating system's main screen the next time  
it is turned on.  
1. If you have entered data, either save it to the hard disk drive or to other  
storage media.  
2. Make sure all disk/disc activity has stopped before removing the  
CD/DVD or floppy diskette.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-7  
           
Getting Started  
■ Make sure the Hard Disk Drive indicator is off. If you turn off the power  
while a disk (disc) is being accessed, you may lose data or damage the  
disk.  
■ Never turn off the power while an application is running. Doing so may  
cause loss of data.  
■ Never turn off the power, disconnect an external storage device or  
remove storage media during data read/write. Doing so may cause  
data loss.  
3. Click Start.  
4. Click the arrow button (  
) located in the power management buttons  
(
) and select Shut Downfrom the menu.  
5. Turn off any peripheral devices connected to your computer.  
Do not turn the computer or peripheral devices back on immediately - wait  
a short period to avoid any potential damage.  
Sleep Mode  
If you have to interrupt your work, you are able to turn off the power without  
exiting from your software by placing the computer into Sleep Mode. In this  
mode data is maintained in the computer's main memory so that when you  
turn on the power again, you can continue working right where you left off.  
■ When the AC adaptor is connected, the computer will go into Sleep  
Mode according to the settings in the Power Options (to access it, Start  
-> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).  
■ To restore the operation of the computer from Sleep Mode, press and  
hold the power button or any key on the keyboard for a short amount of  
time. Please note that keyboard keys can only be used if the Wake-up  
on Keyboard option is enabled within the HW Setup utility.  
■ If the computer enters Sleep Mode while a network application is  
active, the application might not be restored when the computer is next  
turned on and the system returns from Sleep Mode.  
■ To prevent the computer from automatically entering Sleep Mode,  
disable Sleep Mode within the Power Options (to access it, Start ->  
Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).  
■ To use the Hybrid Sleep function, configure it in the Power Options.  
■ Before entering Sleep Mode, be sure to save your data.  
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in  
Sleep Mode. The computer or the memory module could be damaged.  
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode  
(unless the computer is connected to an AC power source). Data in  
memory could be lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-8  
   
Getting Started  
Turning off your computer where electronic devices are regulated or  
controlled.  
When you have to turn off your computer aboard an aircraft or in places  
where electronic devices are regulated or controlled, always shut down the  
computer completely or put the computer into hibernation mode instead of  
allowing it to go into Standby Mode (Sleep Mode) and turn off any wireless  
communication switches or devices. While in Standby Mode (Sleep Mode),  
the computer operating system may reactivate itself to run pre-  
programmed tasks or to preserve unsaved data, and might interfere with  
aviation or other systems, possibly causing serious injury.  
Benefits of Sleep Mode  
The Sleep Mode feature provides the following benefits:  
■ Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than does the  
Hibernation Mode feature.  
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives  
no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System  
Sleep Mode feature.  
■ Allows the use of the panel power off feature.  
Executing Sleep Mode  
You can also enable Sleep Mode by pressing FN + F3 - please refer to  
Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.  
You can enter Sleep Mode in one of four ways:  
■ Click Start then click the power button (  
) located in the power  
management buttons (  
).  
Please note that this feature must be enabled within the Power Options  
(to access it, click Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance  
-> Power Options).  
■ Click Start then click the arrow button (  
) and select Sleepfrom the  
menu.  
■ Close the display panel. Please note that this feature must be enabled  
within the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Control Panel ->  
System and Maintenance -> Power Options).  
■ Press the power button. Please note that this feature must be enabled  
within the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Control Panel ->  
System and Maintenance -> Power Options).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-9  
Getting Started  
When you turn the power back on, you can continue where you left when  
you shut down the computer.  
■ When the computer is in Sleep Mode, the power indicator will blink  
orange.  
■ If you are operating the computer on battery power, you can lengthen  
the overall operating time by turning it off with Hibernation Mode -  
Sleep Mode will consume more power while the computer is off.  
Sleep Mode limitations  
Sleep Mode will not function under the following conditions:  
■ Power is turned back on immediately after shutting down.  
■ Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise.  
Hibernation Mode  
The Hibernation Mode feature saves the contents of memory to the hard  
disk drive when the computer is turned off so that, the next time it is turned  
on, the previous state is restored. Please note that the Hibernation Mode  
feature does not save the status of any peripheral devices connected to the  
computer.  
■ Save your data. While entering Hibernation Mode, the computer saves  
the contents of memory to the hard disk drive. However, for safety  
sake, it is best to save your data manually.  
■ Data will be lost if you remove the battery or disconnect the AC adaptor  
before the save is completed. Wait for the Hard Disk Drive indicator to  
go out.  
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in  
Hibernation Mode. Data will be lost.  
Benefits of Hibernation Mode  
The Hibernation Mode feature provides the following benefits:  
■ Saves data to the hard disk drive when the computer automatically  
shuts down because of a low battery condition.  
■ You can return to your previous working environment immediately when  
you turn on the computer.  
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives  
no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System  
Hibernate feature.  
■ Allows the use of the panel power off feature.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-10  
 
Getting Started  
Starting Hibernation Mode  
You can also enable Hibernation Mode by pressing FN + F4 - please refer  
to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.  
To enter Hibernation Mode, follow the steps below.  
1. Click Start.  
2. Click the arrow button (  
) in the power management buttons  
(
) and select Hibernatefrom the menu.  
Automatic Hibernation Mode  
The computer can be configured to enter Hibernation Mode automatically  
when you press the power button or close the lid. In order to define these  
settings, you can follow the steps as described below:  
1. Click Start and click the Control Panel.  
2. Click System and Maintenance and click Power Options.  
3. Click Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing  
the lid does.  
4. Enable the desired Hibernation Mode settings for When I press the  
power button and When I close the lid.  
5. Click the Save changes button.  
Data save in Hibernation Mode  
When you turn off the power in Hibernation Mode, the computer will take a  
moment to save the current data in memory to the hard disk drive. During  
this time, the Hard Disk Drive indicator will glow.  
After you turn off the computer, and the content of memory has been saved  
to the hard disk drive, turn off the power to any peripheral devices.  
Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment  
to let all capacitors fully discharge.  
Restarting the computer  
Certain conditions require that you reset the computer, for example if:  
■ You change certain computer settings.  
■ An error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard  
commands.  
If you need to restart the computer, there are three ways to achieve it:  
■ Click Start then click the arrow button (  
) in the power management  
buttons ( ) and select Restartfrom the menu.  
■ Press CTRL, ALT and DEL simultaneously (once) to display the menu  
window, then select Restart from the Shut down options.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-11  
 
Getting Started  
■ Press the power button and hold it down for five seconds. Once the  
computer has turned itself off, wait between ten and fifteen seconds  
before turning the power on again by pressing the power button.  
System Recovery Options  
About 1.5GB hidden partition is allocated on the hard disk drive for the  
System Recovery Options.  
This partition stores files which can be used to repair the system in the  
event of a problem.  
The System Recovery Options feature will be unusable if this partition is  
deleted.  
System Recovery Options  
The System Recovery Options feature is installed on the hard disk when  
shipped from the factory. The System Recovery Options menu includes  
tools to repair startup problems, run diagnostics or restore the system.  
See the Windows Help and Support content for more information about  
Startup Repair.  
The System Recovery Options can also be run manually to repair  
problems.  
The procedure is as follows. Follow the instructions shown on the on-  
screen menu.  
1. Turn off the computer.  
2. While holding the F8 key, turn on the computer.  
3. The Advanced Boot Options menu will be displayed.  
Use the arrow keys to select Repair Your Computer and press  
ENTER.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
The Windows VistaTM CompletePC Backup feature can be used on  
Windows VistaTM Business Edition and Ultimate Edition.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-12  
 
Getting Started  
System Recovery  
This section describes the creation of Recovery Discs and their use.  
Creating Optical Recovery Discs  
This section describes how to create Recovery Discs.  
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor when you create Recovery Discs.  
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except the Recovery Disc  
Creator.  
■ Do not run software such as screen savers which can put a heavy load  
on the CPU.  
■ Operate the computer at full power.  
■ Do not use power-saving features.  
■ Do not write to the disc when the virus check software is running. Wait  
for it to finish, then disable virus detection programs including any  
software that checks files automatically in the background.  
■ Do not use utilities, including those intended to enhance hard disk drive  
access speed. They may cause unstable operation and damage data.  
■ Do not shut down/log off or Sleep/Hibernate while writing or rewriting  
the disc.  
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subjected to  
vibrations such as airplanes, trains, or cars.  
■ Do not use on an unstable surface such as a stand.  
A recovery image of the software on your computer is stored on the hard  
disk drive, and can be copied to either CD or DVD media by using the  
following steps:  
1. Select either blank CD or DVD media.  
2. The application will allow you to choose from a variety of different media  
onto which the recovery image can be copied including CD-R, CD-RW,  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL and DVD+RW.  
Please note that some of the above media may not be compatible with the  
optical disc drive installed into your computer. You should therefore verify  
the optical drive supports the blank media you have chosen before  
proceeding.  
3. Turn on your computer and allow it to load the Windows VistaTM  
operating system from the hard disk drive as normal.  
4. Insert the first blank media into the optical disc drive tray.  
5. Double click the Recovery Disc Creator icon on the Windows VistaTM  
desktop, or select the application from Start Menu.  
6. After Recovery Disc Creator starts, select the type of media and the title  
you wish to copy, and then click the Create button.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-13  
 
Getting Started  
If your optical disc drive can only write CDs, select 'CD' as the 'Disc Set'  
within the Recovery Disc Creator application. Otherwise, if your optical  
disc drive can write both CDs and DVDs, select the type of media you wish  
to create.  
Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery hard disk  
drive  
A portion of the total hard disk drive space is configured as a hidden  
recovery partition. This partition stores files which can be used to restore  
pre-installed software in the event of a problem.  
If you subsequently set up your hard disk drive again, do not change,  
delete or add partitions in a manner other than specified in the manual,  
otherwise you may find that space for the required software is not available.  
In addition, if you use a third-party partitioning program to reconfigure the  
partitions on your hard disk drive, you may find that it becomes impossible  
to setup your computer.  
When the sound mute feature has been activated by pressing the FN +  
ESC key, be sure to disable this to allow sounds to be heard before starting  
the restore process. Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further  
details.  
You can not use System Recovery Options if restoring the pre-installed  
software without System Recovery Options.  
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be  
reformatted and all data will be lost.  
1. Turn off your computer.  
2. While holding down 0 (zero) key on the keyboard, turn on your  
computer.  
3. A menu will be displayed from which you should follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-14  
 
Getting Started  
Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery  
Discs  
If the pre-installed files are damaged, you are able to either use the  
Recovery Discs you have created or the hard disk drive recovery process  
to restore the computer to the state it was in when you originally received it.  
To perform this restoration, follow the steps below:  
When the sound mute feature has been activated by pressing the FN +  
ESC key, be sure to disable this to allow sounds to be heard before starting  
the restore process. Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further  
details.  
You can not use System Recovery Options if restoring the pre-installed  
software without System Recovery Options.  
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be  
reformatted and all data will be lost.  
1. Load the Recovery Discs into the optical disc drive and turn off the  
computer's power.  
2. While holding down F12 key on the keyboard, turn on your computer -  
when the In Touch with Tomorrow TOSHIBAlogo screen  
appears, release the F12 key.  
3. Use the left and right cursors key to select the CD-ROM icon from the  
menu. Please refer to the Boot Priority section in Chapter 7, HW Setup  
& BIOS Setup for further information.  
4. A menu will be displayed from which you should follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
When removing pre-installed drivers / utilities or when installing, you can  
setup the respective drivers / utilities from the following folder.  
C:\TOSAPINS\***  
User’s Manual  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
The Grand Tour  
This chapter identifies the various components of the computer - it is  
recommended that you become familiar with each before you operate the  
computer.  
Legal Footnote (Non-applicable Icons)*1  
For more information regarding Non-applicable Icons, please refer to the  
Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *1 above.  
Front with the display closed  
The following figure shows the computer’s front with its display panel in the  
closed position.  
Display latch  
System  
indicators  
Microphone  
Headphone jack  
Volume control  
dial  
Wireless  
communication switch  
Microphone jack  
Figure 2-1 Front of the computer with display panel closed  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1  
       
The Grand Tour  
System indicators  
Microphone  
These LED indicators allow you to monitor the  
status of various computer functions and are  
described in more detail within the System  
indicators section.  
A built-in microphone allows you to record sound  
into your applications - please refer to the Sound  
System section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics  
for more information.  
Only some models are equipped with the built-in  
microphone.  
Microphone jack  
A 3.5 mm mini microphone jack enables  
connection of a three-conductor mini jack for  
monaural microphone input.  
Headphone jack  
A 3.5 mm mini headphone jack enables  
connection of stereo headphones.  
Volume control dial  
Use this dial to adjust the volume of the internal  
stereo speaker and optional external stereo  
headphones (if connected).  
Move the Volume control dial to the right to  
increase the volume and to the left to decrease  
the volume.  
Display latch  
This latch secures the display panel in its closed  
position. Slide the latch to open the display.  
Wireless  
communication  
switch  
Slide this switch to the left to turn off Wireless  
LAN and Bluetooth functions. Slide it to the right  
to turn on the functions.  
Only some models are equipped with Bluetooth  
and Wireless LAN functions.  
®
■ Turn Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functionalities off when near a person who  
may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric  
device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device  
operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of  
your medical device when using any Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionality.  
■ Always turn off Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionality if the computer is near  
automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or  
fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment,  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ Do not use the Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionalities near a microwave  
oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic fields.  
Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt Wi-Fi  
or Bluetooth operation.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-2  
           
The Grand Tour  
Left side  
The following figure shows the computer’s left side.  
PC Card eject  
button  
PC Card slot  
Serial port  
Cooling vents  
Universal Serial Bus  
(USB 2.0)ports  
i.LINK(IEEE1394)  
port  
Bridge media slot  
Figure 2-2 The left side of the computer  
Serial port  
Use this 9-pin port to connect serial devices such  
as an external modem, serial mouse or serial  
printer.  
Only some models are equipped with the serial  
port.  
Cooling vents  
The cooling vents help keep the processor from  
overheating.  
Do not block the cooling vents. Keep foreign metal objects, such as  
screws, staples and paper clips, out of the cooling vents. Foreign metal  
objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire,  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Universal Serial Bus The Universal Serial Bus ports, which comply to  
(USB 2.0) ports  
the USB 2.0 standard, are provided on the left  
hand side of the computer. The port with the icon  
(
) has USB Sleep and Charge function.  
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of  
the USB connectors. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,  
which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Please note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of  
all USB devices that are available. In view of this it may be noted that some  
functions associated with a specific device might not operate properly.  
User’s Manual  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Grand Tour  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
port  
This port allows you to connect an external  
device, such as a digital video camera for high-  
speed data transfer.  
Only some models are equipped with the iLINK  
port.  
Bridge media slot  
This slot lets you insert an SD/SDHC Card,  
Mini/Micro SD Card, Memory Stick (PRO/PRO  
Duo), xD picture card and MultiMediaCard. Refer  
to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.  
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of  
the Bridge media slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,  
which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
PC Card slot  
This slot can accommodate a single Type II, 16-  
bit or 32-bit (CardBus) PC Card device.  
PC Card eject button This button is used in order to remove a PC Card  
from within the computer.  
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of  
the PC Card slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which  
can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Right side  
The following figure shows the computer’s right side.  
Optical disc drive  
Universal Serial Bus  
(USB 2.0) port  
Figure 2-3 The right side of the computer  
Optical disc drive  
A CD-ROM, DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive or DVD  
Super Multi is installed.  
Universal Serial Bus One Universal Serial Bus port, which complies to  
(USB 2.0) port  
the USB 2.0 standard, is provided on the right  
side of the computer.  
User’s Manual  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The Grand Tour  
Back  
The following figure shows the computer’s back.  
LAN active indicator  
(orange)  
Link indicator  
(green)  
Modem jack  
DC IN 15V jack  
External monitor  
port  
LAN jack  
Security lock slot  
Figure 2-4 The back of the computer  
Security lock slot  
A security cable can be attached to this slot and  
then connected to a desk or other large object in  
order to deter theft of the computer.  
Modem jack  
The modem jack lets you use a modular cable to  
connect the modem directly to a telephone line.  
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line  
could cause a PC system failure.  
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a  
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for  
residences or offices.  
■ Never operate your PC on AC power during a thunderstorm. If you see  
lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the PC. An electric surge  
caused by the storm, may result in a system failure, loss of data or  
hardware damage.  
User’s Manual  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Grand Tour  
DC IN 15V jack  
The AC adaptor connects to this jack in order to  
power the computer and charge its internal  
batteries. Please note that you should only use  
the model of AC adaptor supplied with the  
computer at the time of purchase - using the  
wrong AC adaptor can cause damage to the  
computer.  
LAN jack  
This jack lets you connect to a LAN. The adaptor  
has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10  
megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet  
LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX)  
and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per  
second, 1000BASE-T). Refer to Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics, for details.  
■ Do not connect any cable other than a LAN cable to the LAN jack. It  
could cause damage or malfunction.  
■ Do not connect the LAN cable to a power supply. It could cause  
damage or malfunction.  
Link indicator  
(green)  
This indicator glows green when the computer is  
connected to a LAN and the LAN is functioning  
properly.  
LAN active  
This indicator glows orange when data is being  
exchanged between the computer and the LAN.  
indicator (orange)  
External monitor  
port  
This port allows you to connect an external video  
display to the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-6  
       
The Grand Tour  
Underside  
The following figure shows the underside of the computer. You should  
ensure that the display is closed before the computer is turned over to  
avoid causing any damage.  
Notch  
Battery release  
latch  
Battery pack  
Battery lock  
Notch  
Docking  
port  
Memory module slot  
Figure 2-5 The underside of the computer  
Battery lock  
Slide the battery lock to release the battery pack  
ready for removal.  
1
Battery release latch Slide and hold this latch into its 'Unlock' position  
in order to release the battery pack for removal.  
For more detailed information on removing the  
battery pack please refer to Chapter 6, Power  
and Power-Up Modes.  
Notches  
Notches on the computer engage hooks on the  
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator to ensure a  
secure connection.  
Docking port  
This port enables connection of an optional  
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator described in  
Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.  
■ Only the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator can be used with this  
computer. Do not attempt to use any other Port Replicator.  
■ Keep foreign objects out of the docking port. A pin or similar object can  
damage the computer's circuitry. A plastic shutter protects the  
connector.  
User’s Manual  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Grand Tour  
Memory module slot The Slot A and Slot B memory modules are  
located here. The memory module slots allow for  
the installation, replacement and removal of  
memory modules.  
Refer to the Additional memory module section in  
Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.  
Battery pack  
The battery pack provides power to the computer  
when the AC adaptor is not connected. For more  
detailed information on the use and operation of  
the battery pack please refer to Chapter 6, Power  
and Power-Up Modes.  
Front with the display open  
This section shows the computer with the display panel open. In order to  
open the display, simply slide the display latch on the front of the computer,  
lift the display panel up and position it at a comfortable viewing angle for  
you.  
Display screen  
Display hinge  
Display hinge  
Stereo speaker  
(Right)  
AccuPoint  
AccuPoint  
control buttons  
Stereo speaker  
(Left)  
Fingerprint  
Sensor  
Power button  
TOSHIBA Assist  
button  
LCD Sensor switch  
(Not shown)  
Touch Pad  
control buttons  
TOSHIBA  
Presentation button  
Keyboard  
Touch Pad  
Figure 2-6 The front of the computer with the display panel open  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-8  
       
The Grand Tour  
Display hinges  
Display screen  
The display hinges allow the display panel to be  
position at a variety of easy-to-view angles.  
Please be aware that, when the computer is  
operating on the AC adaptor, the image  
displayed on the internal screen will be  
somewhat brighter than when it operates on  
battery power. This difference in brightness  
levels is intended to save power when running on  
batteries. For more information on the  
computer's display, please refer to the Display  
Controller and Video mode section in Appendix  
B.  
Touch Pad  
The Touch Pad mouse control device located in  
the center of the palm rest is used to control the  
movement of the on-screen pointer. For more  
information, please refer to the Using the Touch  
Pad section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Touch Pad control  
buttons  
The control buttons located below the Touch Pad  
allow you to select menu items or manipulate text  
and graphics as designated by the on-screen  
pointer.  
AccuPoint control  
buttons  
Control buttons below the keyboard let you select  
menu items or manipulate text and graphics  
designated by the on-screen pointer. Refer to the  
Using the AccuPoint section in Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics.  
Only some models are equipped with the  
AccuPoint control buttons.  
AccuPoint  
Keyboard  
A pointer control device located in the center of  
the keyboard is used to control the on-screen  
pointer. Refer to the Using the AccuPoint section  
in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Only some models are equipped with the  
AccuPoint.  
The internal keyboard provides the embedded  
numeric overlay keys, dedicated cursor control  
overlay keys, and  
and  
Keys. The  
keyboard is compatible with the IBM® enhanced  
keyboard. Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for  
details.  
Stereo speakers  
The speakers emit sound generated by your  
software as well as audio alarms, such as low  
battery condition, generated by the system.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-9  
           
The Grand Tour  
Power button  
Press this button to turn the computer's power on  
and off.  
TOSHIBA Assist  
button  
Press this button to launch the program  
automatically. When power-off, Sleep Mode and  
Hibernation Mode, press this button to start the  
computer and launch the program.  
Only some models are equipped with TOSHIBA  
Assist button.  
TOSHIBA  
Presentation button  
The TOSHIBA Presentation button has the same  
functionality as the Connect display button in the  
Mobility Center. Pressing this button when an  
external display is connected will open the  
Windows VistaTM TMM (Transient Multimon  
Manager) screen.  
Only some models are equipped with TOSHIBA  
Presentation button.  
Fingerprint Sensor  
LCD Sensor switch  
This sensor enables you to enroll and recognize a  
fingerprint.  
For detailed information on Fingerprint Sensor,  
refer to Chapter 4, Using the Fingerprint Sensor.  
Only some models are equipped with Fingerprint  
Sensor.  
This switch senses when the display panel is  
either closed or opened and activates the Panel  
Power Off/On feature as appropriate. For  
example, when you close the display panel the  
computer enters Hibernation Mode and shuts  
itself down and then, when you next open the  
display, the computer will automatically start up  
and return you to the application you were  
previously working on.  
You can specify within the Power Options. To  
access it, click Start -> Control Panel -> System  
and Maintenance -> Power Options.  
Do not put any magnetic objects close to this switch as they may cause the  
computer to automatically enter Hibernation Mode and shut down even if  
the Panel Power Off feature is disabled.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-10  
The Grand Tour  
Indicators  
This section explains indicator functions.  
System indicators  
LED system indicators next to their respective icons, glow when specific  
computer operations are in progress.  
Figure 2-7 System indicators  
Media slot  
DC IN  
The Media slot indicator glows green when the  
computer is accessing the Bridge media slot.  
The DC IN indicator normally glows green when  
power is being correctly supplied from the AC  
power adaptor. However, If the output voltage  
from the adaptor is abnormal, or if the computer's  
power supply malfunctions, this indicator will  
flash orange.  
Power  
The Power indicator normally glows green when  
the computer is turned on. However, if you turn  
the computer off into Sleep Mode, this indicator  
will flash orange - approximately one second on,  
two seconds off - both while the system is  
shutting down and while it remains turned off.  
Battery  
The Battery indicator shows the condition of the  
battery's charge - green indicates the battery is  
fully charged, orange indicates the battery is  
charging, and flashing orange indicates a low  
battery condition. Please refer to Chapter 6,  
Power and Power-Up Modes for more  
information on this feature.  
Hard Disk Drive  
The Hard Disk Drive indicator glows green when  
the computer is accessing the built-in hard disk  
drive.  
Wireless  
communication  
The Wireless communication indicator blinks  
orange when the Bluetooth and Wireless LAN  
functions are turned on.  
Only some models are equipped with Bluetooth  
and Wireless LAN functions.  
User’s Manual  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
The Grand Tour  
Keyboard indicators  
The following figures show the positions of the CAPS LOCK indicator and  
the keypad overlay indicators which show the following conditions:  
■ When the CAPS LOCK indicator glows, the keyboard will produce  
capitals when any letter is typed.  
■ When the Arrow Mode indicator glows, the keypad overlay allows you to  
use cursor functions.  
■ When the Numeric Mode indicator glows, the keypad overlay allows  
you to enter numbers.  
CAPS LOCK indicator  
Figure 2-8 CAPS LOCK indicator  
CAPS LOCK  
This indicator glows green when letter keys are  
locked into their uppercase format.  
Arrow mode  
indicator  
Numeric mode  
indicator  
Figure 2-9 Keypad overlay indicators  
Arrow mode  
When the Arrow mode indicator lights green,  
you can use the gray labeled keys on the keypad  
overlay as cursor keys. Please refer to the  
Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, The  
Keyboard for more information.  
Numeric mode  
When the Numeric mode indicator lights green,  
you can use the gray labeled keys on the keypad  
overlay for number entry. Please refer to the  
Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, The  
Keyboard for more information.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-12  
The Grand Tour  
Optical disc drives  
The computer is installed with either a CD-ROM, DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW or  
DVD Super Multi drive. An ATAPI interface controller is used for CD/DVD-  
ROM operation. When the computer is accessing a CD/DVD, an indicator  
on the drive glows.  
For information on loading and unloading discs refer to the Using optical  
disc drives section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Region codes for DVD drives and media  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW, DVD Super Multi drives and their associated media  
are manufactured according to the specifications of six marketing regions.  
When you purchase DVD-Video, make sure it matches your drive,  
otherwise it will not play properly.  
Code  
Region  
1
2
3
4
Canada, United States  
Japan, Europe, South Africa, Middle East  
Southeast Asia, East Asia  
Australia, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, Central  
America, South America, Caribbean  
5
6
Russia, Indian Subcontinent, Africa, North Korea,  
Mongolia  
China  
Writable discs  
This section describes the types of writable CD/DVD discs. Check the  
specifications of your drive to see the types of discs it can write. Use  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator to write compact discs. Refer to Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics.  
CDs  
■ CD-R discs can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be  
erased or changed.  
■ CD-RW discs including multi speed CD-RW discs, high-speed CD-RW  
discs and ultra-speed CD-RW discs can be recorded more than once.  
User’s Manual  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Grand Tour  
DVDs  
■ DVD-R and DVD+R discs can be written only once. The recorded data  
cannot be erased or changed.  
■ DVD-RW, DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can be recorded more than  
once.  
Formats  
The drives support the following formats.  
CD-ROM drive  
The drive supports the formats CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CD™ (single/ multi-  
session), CD-ROM Mode1, Mode2, CD-ROM XA Mode2 (Form1, Form2),  
Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA) and Addressing Method 2.  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive  
The drive supports the formats CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, DVD-Video, CD-DA,  
CD-Text, Photo CD™ (single/ multi-session), CD-ROM Mode1, Mode2,  
CD-ROM XA Mode2 (Form1, Form2), Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA),  
Addressing Method 2, CD-R and CD-RW.  
DVD Super Multi drive Double Layer  
The drive supports the formats in addition to the DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW  
drive, and DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL  
(Format1), DVD+R DL.  
Some types and formats of DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs may be  
unreadable.  
CD-ROM drive  
The full-size CD-ROM drive module lets you run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8  
cm (3.15") CD without using an adaptor.  
The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer  
edge.  
CD read  
24 speed (maximum)  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive  
The full-size DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive module lets you record data to  
rewritable CDs as well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CD/DVDs  
without using an adaptor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-14  
The Grand Tour  
The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer  
edge.  
DVD read  
CD read  
8 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum)  
CD-R write  
CD-RW write  
24 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum, Ultra-speed media)  
DVD Super Multi drive Double Layer  
The full-size DVD Super Multi drive module lets you record data to  
rewritable CD/DVDs as well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8cm (3.15")  
CD/DVDs without using an adaptor.  
The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer  
edge.  
DVD read  
8 speed (maximum)  
DVD-R write  
DVD-R DL write  
DVD-RW write  
DVD+R write  
DVD+R DL write  
DVD+RW write  
DVD-RAM write  
CD read  
8 speed (maximum)  
2 speed (maximum)  
4 speed (maximum)  
8 speed (maximum)  
2.4 speed (maximum)  
4 speed (maximum)  
5 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum)  
16 speed (maximum, Ultra-speed media)  
CD-R write  
CD-RW write  
AC adaptor  
The AC adaptor can automatically adjust to any voltage ranging from 100 to  
240 volts and to a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz, enabling you to use  
this computer in almost all country/region. The adaptor converts AC power  
to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied to this computer.  
To recharge the battery, simply connect the AC adaptor to a power source  
and to the computer. Please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes for further information.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-15  
   
The Grand Tour  
Figure 2-10 The AC adaptor (2-pin plug)  
Figure 2-11 The AC adaptor (3-pin plug)  
■ Depending on the model in question, either a 2-pin or 3-pin  
adaptor/power lead will be bundled with the computer.  
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.  
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in  
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside of this  
region. In order to use the adaptor/computer in other regions, you  
should please buy a power cord that conforms to the safety rules and  
regulations in that particular region.  
Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was included with your  
computer and the TOSHIBA Battery Charger (that may have been included  
with your computer), or use AC adaptors and battery chargers specified by  
TOSHIBA to avoid any risk of fire or other damage to the computer. Use of  
an incompatible AC adaptor or Battery Charger could cause fire or damage  
to the computer possibly resulting in serious injury. TOSHIBA assumes no  
liability for any damage caused by use of an incompatible adaptor or  
Battery Charger.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-16  
Chapter 3  
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Hardware  
This section describes the hardware of your computer. The actual  
specifications may vary depending on the model you purchased.  
Processor  
CPU  
The computer is equipped with one of the  
following Intel® processors.  
■ Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo Processor, which  
incorporates a 2MB level2 cache memory. It  
also supports Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep®  
Technology.  
■ Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo Processor, which  
incorporates a 4MB level2 cache memory. It  
also supports Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep®  
Technology.  
■ Intel® Celeron® Processor, which incorporates  
a 1MB level2 cache memory.  
Some models in this series carry Intel® Centrino® Duo Processor  
Technology, which is based on three separate technologies of Intel®  
CoreTM 2 Duo processor, Intel® PRO/Wireless Network Connection, and  
Mobile Intel® 965 Express Chipset Family.  
Legal Footnote (CPU)*2  
For more information on the CPU, please refer to the Legal Footnotes  
section in Appendix K or Click the *2 above.  
User’s Manual  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Memory  
Slots  
256, 512, 1,024 or 2,048MB memory modules  
can be installed in the computer's two memory  
slots for a maximum of 4,096MB system memory.  
Video RAM  
The amount of Video RAM available is  
dependent on the computer's system memory.  
Start -> Control Panel -> Appearance and  
Personalization -> Personalization -> Display  
Settings.  
The amount of Video RAM can be verified by  
clicking the Advanced Settings... button in the  
Display Settings window.  
Legal Footnote (Memory (Main System))*3  
For more information regarding Memory (Main System), please refer to the  
Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *3 above.  
Power  
Battery pack  
The computer is powered by one rechargeable  
lithium-ion battery pack.  
Legal Footnote (Battery Life)*4  
For more information regarding Battery Life, please refer to the Legal  
Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *4 above.  
RTC battery  
AC adaptor  
The internal RTC battery backs up the Real Time  
Clock (RTC) and calendar.  
The AC adaptor provides power to the system  
and recharges the batteries when they are low. It  
comes with a detachable power cord which will  
either have a 2-pin or 3-pin plug enclosure.  
As the AC adaptor is universal, it can receive a  
range of AC voltages from 100 to 240 volts,  
however you should note that the output current  
varies among different models. Using the wrong  
adaptor can damage your computer. Refer to the  
AC adaptor section in Chapter 2, The Grand  
Tour.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2  
             
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Disks  
Hard disk drive  
This computer is equipped with one of the  
following hard disk drive types. The capacity of  
each hard disk drive model is different.  
■ 60.0 billion bytes (55.89 GB)  
■ 80.0 billion bytes (74.53 GB)  
■ 120.0 billion bytes (111.79 GB)  
■ 160.0 billion bytes (149.05 GB)  
Please note that part of the hard disk drive's  
overall capacity is reserved as administration  
space.  
Legal Footnote (Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity)*5  
For more information regarding Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity, please  
refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *5 above.  
Optical disc drive  
Drive  
One of the following optical disc drives is pre-  
installed in this computer.  
■ CD-ROM drive  
■ DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive  
■ DVD Super Multi Double Layer drive  
2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM media cannot be read from or written to.  
Display  
The computer's internal display panel supports high-resolution video  
graphics and can be set to a wide range of viewing angles for maximum  
comfort and readability.  
Display panel  
15.4” TFT LCD screen, 16 million colors, with  
one of the following resolutions:  
■ WXGA, 1280 horizontal x 800 vertical pixels  
■ WSXGA+, 1680 horizontal x 1050 vertical  
pixels  
Legal Footnote (LCD)*6  
For more information regarding the LCD, please refer to the Legal  
Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *6 above.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-3  
       
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Graphics controller  
The graphics controller maximizes display  
performance. Refer to Display Controller and  
Video mode section in Appendix B for more  
information.  
Legal Footnote (Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"))*7  
For more information regarding the Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"),  
please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *7  
above.  
Sound  
Sound system  
The integrated sound system provides support  
for the computer's internal speakers and  
microphone, as allowing an external microphone  
and headphones to be connected via the  
appropriate jacks.  
Communications  
Modem  
An internal modem provides capability for data  
and fax communication. It supports V.90 (V.92).  
Refer to V.90 section in Appendix E. The speed  
of data transfer and fax depends on analog  
telephone line conditions. It has a modem jack  
for connecting to a telephone line. It is  
preinstalled as a standard device in some  
markets. Both of V.90 and V.92 are supported  
only in USA and Canada. Only V.90 is available  
in other regions.  
LAN  
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet  
LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast  
Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,  
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000  
megabits per second, 1000BASE-T).  
It is pre-installed as a standard device in some  
markets.  
Bluetooth  
Some computers in this series offer Bluetooth  
wireless communication functionality which  
eliminates the need for cables between  
electronic devices such as computers, printers  
and mobile phones. When implemented,  
Bluetooth provides a fast, reliable and secure  
means to achieve wireless communication in a  
small space.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-4  
         
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Wireless LAN  
Some computers in this series are equipped with  
a Wireless LAN card that is compatible with other  
LAN systems based on Direct Sequence Spread  
Spectrum/Orthogonal Frequency Division  
Multiplexing radio technology that complies with  
the IEEE 802.11 Standard (Revision A, B, G or N  
Draft Ver. 1.0).  
Legal Footnote (Wireless LAN)*8  
For more information regarding Wireless LAN, please refer to the Legal  
Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *8 above.  
Special features  
The following features are either unique to TOSHIBA computers or are  
advanced features which make the computer more convenient to use.  
Access each function using the following procedures.  
*1 To access the Power Options, click Start -> Control Panel -> System  
and Maintenance -> Power Options.  
TOSHIBA Assist  
button  
Press this button to launch the program  
automatically. When power-off, Sleep Mode and  
Hibernation Mode, press this button to start the  
computer and launch the program.  
TOSHIBA  
The TOSHIBA Presentation button has the same  
Presentation button functionality as the Connect display button in the  
Mobility Center. Pressing this button when an  
external display is connected will open the  
Windows VistaTM TMM (Transient Multimon  
Manager) screen.  
Hot keys  
Hot keys are specific key combinations that let  
you quickly change the system configuration  
directly from the keyboard without running a  
system program.  
Display automatic  
This feature automatically cuts off power to the  
computer's display panel when there is no  
keyboard input for a specified time, with power  
being restored the next time a key is pressed.  
This can be specified in the Power Options.  
*1  
power off  
HDD automatic  
This feature automatically cuts off power to the  
hard disk drive when it is not accessed for a  
specified time, with power being restored when  
the hard disk drive is next accessed. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
*1  
power off  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-5  
                 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
System automatic  
Sleep/Hibernation  
This feature automatically shuts down the system  
into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode when  
there is no input or hardware access for a  
specified time. This can be specified in the Power  
Options.  
*1  
Mode  
Keypad overlay  
A ten-key numeric keypad is integrated into the  
keyboard. Please refer to the Keypad overlay  
section in Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for  
information on using this feature.  
Power on password Two levels of password security, supervisor and  
user, are available to prevent unauthorized  
access to your computer.  
Instant security  
A specific hot key function automatically locks the  
system providing data security.  
Intelligent power  
A microprocessor in the computer's intelligent  
power supply detects the battery's charge,  
automatically calculates the remaining battery  
capacity and protects electronic components  
from abnormal conditions such as a voltage  
overload from the AC adaptor. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
*1  
supply  
*1  
This feature lets you configure the computer in  
order to save battery power. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
Battery save mode  
Panel power on/off  
*1  
This feature automatically turns power to the  
computer off when the display panel is closed,  
and turns it back on when the display panel is  
opened. This can be specified in the Power  
Options.  
Low battery  
automatic  
When battery power is exhausted to the point that  
computer operation cannot be continued, the  
system automatically enters Hibernation Mode  
and shuts itself down. This can be specified in the  
Power Options.  
*1  
Hibernation Mode  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-6  
         
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
*1  
To protect against overheating, the processor has  
an internal temperature sensor so that, if the  
computer's internal temperature rises to a certain  
level, the cooling fan is turned on or the  
processing speed is lowered. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
Heat dispersal  
TOSHIBA HDD  
Protection  
This feature uses the acceleration sensor built in  
the computer to detect vibration and shocks, and  
automatically moves the hard disk drive's  
read/write head to a safe position in order to  
reduce the risk of damage that could be caused  
by head-to-disk contact. Refer to the Using the  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection section in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics, for more details.  
The TOSHIBA HDD Protection function does not guarantee that the hard  
disk drive will not be damaged.  
Hibernation Mode  
This feature lets you turn off the power to the  
computer without exiting from your software. The  
contents of main memory are automatically  
saved to the hard disk drive so that when you  
next turn the power on again, you can continue  
working right where you left off. Refer to the  
Turning off the power section in Chapter 1,  
Getting Started, for more details.  
Sleep Mode  
If you have to interrupt your work, you can use  
this feature to allow you to turn off power to the  
computer without exiting from your software.  
Data is maintained in the computer's main  
memory so that when you next turn on the power,  
you can continue working right where you left off.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-7  
     
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
TOSHIBA Value Added Package  
This section describes the TOSHIBA Component features pre-installed on  
the computer.  
TOSHIBA Power  
Saver  
TOSHIBA Power Saver provides you with the  
features of more various power supply  
managements.  
TOSHIBA Button  
Support  
This utility controls the following computer button  
functions.  
■ TOSHIBA Assist  
■ TOSHIBA Presentation  
The starting application from the button can be  
changed.  
TOSHIBA Button Support cannot be used in models that are not equipped  
with TOSHIBA Assist/Presentation button.  
TOSHIBA Zooming  
Utility  
This utility allows you to enlarge or reduce the  
icon size on the Windows Desktop, or the zoom  
factor associated with specific supported  
applications.  
TOSHIBA PC  
Diagnostic Tool  
The TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool will display  
basic system configuration information and allow  
the functionality of some of the computer's built-  
in hardware devices to be tested.  
TOSHIBA Password The TOSHIBA Password utility allows you to set  
a password in order to restrict access to the  
computer.  
Utility  
TOSHIBA Flash  
Cards  
The TOSHIBA Flash Cards provide a quick way  
to modify selected system functions and to  
launch applications.  
■ Hot key function  
■ TOSHIBA utility launcher function  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-8  
       
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
HW Setup  
This utility allows you to customize your  
hardware settings according to the way you work  
with the computer and the peripherals you use.  
TOSHIBA  
Accessibility  
The TOSHIBA Accessibility utility provides  
support to movement impaired users when they  
need to use the TOSHIBA Hot-key functions. In  
use, the utility allows you to make the FN key  
'sticky', that is you can press it once, release it,  
and they press one of the 'F' keys in order to  
access its specific function. When set, the FN  
key will remain active until another key is  
pressed.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-9  
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Utilities and Applications  
This section describes the pre-installed utilities that come with the  
computer and details how to start them. For further information on their  
operation, please refer to each utility's online manual, help files or  
README.TXT file.  
Fingerprint Utility  
This product has a fingerprint utility installed for  
the purpose of enrolling and recognizing  
fingerprints which can then be linked to a  
username and password in order to remove the  
need to input these details from the keyboard.  
Just by swiping an enrolled finger against the  
fingerprint sensor, the following functions will be  
enabled:  
■ Logon to Windows and access a security  
enabled homepage through Internet Explorer.  
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted  
and third party access to them is prevented.  
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver  
when returning from a power-saving mode  
such as Sleep Mode.  
■ Authentication of the User Password (and, if  
applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive)  
Password) when booting up the computer  
(Power-on Security).  
■ Single Sign-on feature  
The Fingerprint function cannot be used in models that are not equipped  
with a Fingerprint module.  
DVD Video Player  
The DVD Video Player is used to play DVD-  
Video. It has an on-screen interface and  
functions. Click Start -> All Programs ->  
InterVideo WinDVD -> InterVideo WinDVD for  
TOSHIBA.  
■ Frame dropping, audio skipping or out of synch audio and video may  
occur during playback of some DVD Video titles.  
■ Make sure to connect the computer’s AC adaptor when playing a DVD  
Video. Power-saving features may interfere with smooth playback.  
■ By using WinDVD, a horizontal white line may appear during playback  
of a DVD media in VR-format. In such case, additional memory is  
recommended.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-10  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Bluetooth Stack for  
This software enables communication between  
Windows by Toshiba the computer and external Bluetooth devices  
such as printers and mobile phones.  
Bluetooth functions cannot be used in models that do not have a Bluetooth  
module installed.  
TOSHIBA SD  
The TOSHIBA SD memory boot utility allows you  
Memory Boot Utility to create a bootable SD memory card to start the  
system. You can boot TOSHIBA SD Memory  
Boot Utility from the menu bar as follows. Click  
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities  
-> SD Memory Boot Utility.  
SD Memory Card Format Utility and other SD functions are packaged into  
TOSHIBA SD Memory Utilities.  
TOSHIBA SD  
This utility allows you to format an SD/SDHC  
Memory Card Format memory card by the SD standard format.  
TOSHIBA Assist  
TOSHIBA Assist is a graphical user interface that  
provides access to specific tools, utilities and  
applications that make the use and configuration  
of the computer easier.  
TOSHIBA ConfigFree TOSHIBA ConfigFree is a suite of utilities that  
improve the ease and control of communication  
devices and network connections, help in the  
identification of communication problems and  
allow the creation of profiles if you need to switch  
between different locations and communication  
networks. To access this utility, click Start -> All  
Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Networking ->  
ConfigFree.  
TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator  
You can create CDs and DVDs in a number of  
formats including audio CDs that can be played  
on a standard CD player, and data CDs/DVDs  
which can store copies of the files and folders on  
your computer's hard disk drive. This software  
can be used on models with a DVD Super Multi  
drive.  
To start this utility, click Start -> All Programs ->  
TOSHIBA -> CD&DVD Applications -> Disc  
Creator.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-11  
           
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
TOSHIBA DVD-RAM This utility has the function of Physical Format  
Utility  
and Write-Protect to DVD-RAM. This utility is  
contained the setup module of TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator. To start this utility, click Start -> All  
Programs -> TOSHIBA -> CD&DVD  
Applications -> DVD-RAM Utility.  
CD/DVD Drive  
Acoustic Silencer  
This utility allows you to configure the read speed  
of the optical disc drive. You can either configure  
Normal Mode, which operates the drive at its  
maximum speed for quick data access, or Quiet  
Mode which runs audio CDs at single speed and  
which can lessen operational noise.  
It is ineffective with DVDs.  
Display Rotation  
Settings  
This utility allows you to quickly rotate the  
Windows Desktop by either 0 degrees and 180  
degrees. In use you are able to perform a  
rotation function by pressing either CTRL + ALT  
+ Up Arrow (  
+ ALT + Down Arrow (  
) to rotate 0 degrees or CTRL  
) to rotate 180  
degrees - in a multi-monitor setup, the display  
that contains the cursor will be affected by these  
changes.  
Windows Mobility  
Center  
This section describes the Windows Mobility  
Center. Mobility Center is a utility for accessing  
several mobile PC settings quickly in one  
window. A default maximum of eight tiles are  
provided by the operating system, and the  
additional two tiles are added to your Mobility  
Center.  
■ Lock Computer :  
This can be used to lock your computer  
without turning it off. This has the same  
function as the Lock button at the bottom of  
the right pane in the start menu.  
■ TOSHIBA Assist :  
This can be used to open TOSHIBA Assist if  
it is already installed in your computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-12  
   
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Optional devices  
Optional devices can expand the computer's capabilities and its versatility.  
This section describes the connection or installation of the following  
devices:  
Cards/memory  
■ PC Card  
■ Bridge media slot  
■ SD Card (SD memory card, SDHC card, Mini SD card, Micro SD  
card)  
■ Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo  
■ xD picture card  
■ MultiMediaCard  
■ Additional memory module  
Peripheral devices  
■ Battery Charger  
■ External monitor  
■ USB FDD Kit  
■ i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
■ Serial port  
■ TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator  
Other  
■ Security lock  
PC Card  
The computer is equipped with a single PC Card slot that can  
accommodate a Type II format card. Any PC Card that meets industry  
standards, either manufactured by TOSHIBA or another vendor, can be  
installed as the slot supports 16-bit PC Cards and 32-bit CardBus cards.  
For reference, CardBus supports the newer standard of 32-bit PC Cards  
and provides superior performance for the greater demands of applications  
such as multimedia data transmission.  
PC Cards can sometimes become hot during computer operation. Before  
you remove a PC Card always wait for it to cool. You could get burned  
removing a hot PC Card.  
Inserting a PC Card  
The Windows hot-install feature allows you to insert PC Cards while the  
computer is turned on.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-13  
     
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Do not insert a PC Card while the computer is in Sleep Mode or  
Hibernation Mode as you may find that some cards do not work properly.  
To insert a PC Card, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Insert the PC Card into the PC Card slot on the side of the computer.  
2. Press the PC Card gently to ensure a firm connection is made.  
PC Card slot  
PC Card  
Figure 3-1 Inserting the PC Card  
3. After inserting the PC Card you should refer to its documentation and  
also check the configuration in Windows in order to ensure that it is  
correct.  
Removing a PC Card  
To remove a PC Card, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Task Bar.  
2. Point to PC Card and click the left Touch Pad control button.  
3. Press the PC Card eject button to partially extend it out of the computer.  
If the PC Card is not inserted all the way into the computer, the eject button  
may not cause it to pop out sufficiently to allows it to be grasped. In this  
instance, simply push the PC Card firmly back into the computer and then  
press the eject button again.  
4. Press the extended PC Card eject button in order to eject the PC Card  
partially out of the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-14  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
5. Grasp the PC Card and remove it.  
PC Card  
PC Card  
eject button  
Figure 3-2 Removing the PC Card  
Bridge media slot  
The computer is equipped with a Bridge media slot that can accommodate  
some kinds of memory media with various memory capacities so that you  
can easily transfer data from devices, such as digital cameras and  
Personal Digital Assistants.  
■ This Bridge media slot supports the following memory media.  
■ Secure Digital (SD) Card (SD memory card, SDHC card, Mini SD  
card, Micro SD card)  
■ Memory Stick  
■ Memory Stick PRO  
■ Memory Stick PRO Duo  
■ xD picture card  
■ MultiMediaCard (MMC)  
Please note that an adaptor is required to use Mini/Micro SD card and  
Memory Stick PRO Duo.  
■ Please note that not all memory media have been tested and verified to  
work correctly. Therefore, it is not possible to guarantee that all  
memory media will operate properly.  
■ The slot does not support Magic Gate functions.  
SD memory card  
Memory stick  
xD picture card  
MultiMedia Card  
Figure 3-3 Samples of memory media  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-15  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot. Never allow metal  
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer or  
keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can  
cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Memory card care  
■ Memory media have a limited lifespan, so it is important to backup  
important data.  
■ Do not write to memory media if the battery power is low. Low power  
could affect writing accuracy.  
■ Do not remove memory media while reading/writing is in progress.  
■ Memory media is designed so that it can be inserted only one way. Do  
not try to force the media into the slot.  
■ Do not leave memory media partially inserted in the slot. Press the  
memory media until you hear it click into place.  
■ Do not twist or bend memory media.  
■ Do not expose memory media to liquids or store in humid areas or lay  
the media close to containers of liquid.  
■ After using memory media, return it to its case.  
■ Do not touch the metal part or expose it to liquids or let it get dirty.  
For more details on using memory media, see manuals accompanying the  
media.  
SD/SDHC card  
SD/SDHC memory cards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital Music  
Initiative), which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or  
playback of digital music. For this reason, you cannot copy or playback  
protected material on another computer or other device, and you may not  
reproduce any copyrighted material except for your personal enjoyment.  
The Logo of SD memory card is (  
The Logo of SDHC memory card is (  
).  
).  
Card Type  
Capacities  
SD  
8MB, 16MB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB, 256MB,  
512MB, 1GB, 2GB  
SDHC  
4GB  
The SDHC memory card is supported only with Windows Vista™.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-16  
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to record  
data.  
Formatting an SD/SDHC memory card  
SD/SDHC memory cards are sold already formatted in conformity to  
specific standards. If you format the SD/SDHC Card again, be sure to  
format it with the TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility, not with the  
format command provided within Windows.  
In order to run the TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility, click Start ->  
All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> SD Memory Card Format.  
Please note that the TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility does not  
format the protected area of the SD/SDHC memory card - should you need  
to format all areas of the memory card, including the protected area, you  
will need to obtain an appropriate application that applies the copy  
protection system.  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO  
Duo/MultiMediaCard  
Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to record  
data.  
Inserting memory media  
The following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices.  
1. Turn the memory media so that the contacts (metal areas) are face  
down.  
2. Insert the media into the Bridge media slot on the side of the computer.  
3. Press the media gently to ensure a firm connection is made.  
Bridge media  
slot  
Memory media  
Figure 3-4 Inserting memory media  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-17  
     
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
■ Make sure memory media is oriented properly before you insert it. If  
you insert the media in wrong direction, you may not be able to remove it.  
■ Always use a Memory Stick Duo adaptor when inserting a Memory  
Stick PRO Duo into the slot. If you insert a Memory Stick PRO Duo  
without the adaptor, you may not be able to remove it.  
■ When inserting memory media, do not touch the metal contacts. You  
could expose the storage area to static electricity, which can destroy  
data.  
■ Do not turn the computer off or switch to Sleep Mode or Hibernation  
Mode while files are being copied - doing so may cause data to be lost.  
Removing memory media  
To remove memory media, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Task Bar.  
2. Point to memory card and click the left Touch Pad control button.  
3. Press the memory media to partially extend it out of the computer.  
4. Grasp the media and remove it.  
Bridge media  
slot  
Memory media  
Figure 3-5 Removing memory media  
■ Make sure the Media slot indicator is out before you remove the  
memory media or turn off the computer’s power. If you remove the  
memory media or turn off the power while the computer is accessing  
the media, you may lose data or damage the media.  
■ Do not remove the memory media while the computer is in Sleep or  
Hibernation Mode. The computer could become unstable or data in the  
media could be lost.  
■ Do not remove only the Mini/Micro SD card or Memory Stick PRO Duo  
while leaving the adaptor in the Bridge Media slot.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-18  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Additional memory module  
This computer is equipped with two memory slots; Slot A and Slot B. Both  
slots are located in the underside of the computer.  
You can install additional memory into the computer in order to increase the  
amount of system memory that is available. This section describes how to  
install and remove optional memory modules.  
■ You should place a mat beneath the computer in order to prevent the  
computer's lid from becoming scratched or damaged when you are  
installing/replacing the memory module. In this instance you should  
avoid mats that are made of materials that hold or generate static  
electricity.  
■ When installing or removing a memory module, you must ensure that  
you do not touch any other internal areas of the computer.  
■ Insert the two memory modules into Slot A and Slot B respectively. The  
computer will operate in dual channel mode.  
You can access the inserted memory modules efficiently in dual  
channel.  
■ Use only memory modules approved by TOSHIBA.  
■ Do not try to install or remove a memory module under the following  
conditions.  
a. The computer is turned on.  
b. The computer was shut down in either Sleep or Hibernation Mode.  
c. Wake-up on LAN is enabled.  
d. Wake-up on Wireless LAN is enabled.  
e. The wireless communication switch is turned on.  
■ Be careful not to let screws or other foreign matter fall into the  
computer. It could cause malfunction or electric shock.  
■ Additional memory module is a precision electronic component that  
may be fatally damaged by static electricity. Since the human body can  
carry static electricity, it is important that you discharge yourself before  
touching or installing any additional memory modules. To discharge  
your body’s static electricity, simply touch any metal close to you with  
bare hands.  
Point to note about memory module error  
If you install a memory module that is not compatible with the computer, the  
Power indicator will flashes (on for 0.5 seconds, off for 0.5 seconds) in the  
following ways;  
■ If there is only an error in Slot A: repeatedly flashes orange twice, then  
green.  
■ If there is only an error in Slot B: repeatedly flashes orange, then green  
twice.  
■ If there is an error in Slot A and in Slot B: repeatedly flashes orange  
twice, then green twice.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-19  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
In all instances you should shut down the computer and remove the  
incompatible module(s).  
Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver to remove and fasten the screws -  
the use of an incorrect screwdriver can damage the screw heads.  
Installing a memory module (Slot A and Slot B)  
The computer contains slots for two memory modules, one positioned  
immediately over the other - the procedures are the same for installing  
either module.  
1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the  
Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in  
Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).  
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to  
the computer.  
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to  
the Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-  
Up Modes, if required).  
4. Loosen the screw securing the memory module cover in place - please  
note that this screw is attached to the cover in order to prevent it from  
being lost.  
Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver.  
5. Slide your fingernail or a thin object under the cover and lift it off.  
Memorymodule  
cover  
Screw  
Figure 3-6 Removing the memory module cover  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-20  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
6. Align the notch of the memory module with that of the memory slot and  
gently insert the module into the slot at about a 45 degree angle before  
holding it down until the latches on either side snap into place.  
Slot B  
Slot A  
Modem module  
Figure 3-7 Seating the memory module  
■ Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to  
enter the computer. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,  
which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in  
serious injury.  
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the  
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access  
problems.  
■ The slot A is reserved for the first memory module. Use the slot B for  
expanded memory. If only one module is installed, use the slot A.  
When inserting or removing memory modules, use the A and B marked  
on the computer chassis to determine which slot is A and which is B.  
■ Align the grooves along the edges of the memory module with the  
locking tabs on the connector and insert the module into the connector  
firmly - if you find it difficult to install the memory module, gently prise  
the locking tabs outwards using the tip of your finger.  
Please also ensure that you hold the memory module along its left and  
right hand edges - the edges with the grooves in.  
7. Seat the memory module cover in place and secure it with one screw.  
Take care to ensure that the memory module cover is firmly closed.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-21  
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Screw  
Memory module  
cover  
Figure 3-8 Seating the memory module cover  
8. Install the battery pack - refer to Replacing the battery pack section in  
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required.  
9. Turn your computer over.  
10. Turn the computer on and make sure the added memory is recognized -  
to confirmed it, Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance ->  
System icon.  
Removing a memory module (Slot A and Slot B)  
To remove the memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the  
Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in  
Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).  
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to  
the computer.  
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to  
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes, if required).  
4. Loosen the screw securing the memory module cover in place - please  
note that this screw is attached to the cover in order to prevent it from  
being lost.  
5. Slide your fingernail or a thin object under the cover and lift it off.  
6. Push the latches away from the module in order to release it - a spring  
will force one end of the module up at an angle.  
7. Grasp the module by its edges and remove it from the computer.  
■ If you use the computer for a long time, the memory modules and the  
circuits locating close to the memory modules will become hot. In this  
case, let them cool to room temperature before you replace them. Or  
you will get burnt if you touch any of them.  
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the  
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access  
problems.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-22  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Latches  
Slot A  
Slot B  
Figure 3-9 Removing the memory module  
8. Seat the memory module cover in place and secure it with one screw.  
Take care to ensure that the memory module cover is firmly closed.  
9. Install the battery pack - refer to Replacing the battery pack section in  
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required.  
10. Turn your computer over.  
Battery Charger  
The battery charger provides a convenient way to charge battery packs  
without requiring the use of your computer. The battery charger holds up to  
two battery packs (lithium ion).  
External monitor  
An external analog monitor can be connected to the external monitor port  
on the computer. To connect a monitor, follow the steps as detailed below:  
Connecting the monitor cable  
1. Turn the computer's power off.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-23  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
2. Connect the monitor cable to the external monitor port.  
External monitor port  
Monitor cable  
Figure 3-10 Connecting the monitor cable to the external monitor port  
3. Turn the external monitor's power on.  
4. Turn the computer's power on.  
When you turn on the power, the computer will automatically recognize the  
monitor and determine whether it is a color or monochrome device. In the  
event that you find that there are issues getting an image displayed on the  
correct monitor, you should consider using the FN + F5 hot key to change  
the display settings (if you then disconnect the external monitor before you  
turn the computer's power off, be sure to press FN + F5 hot key again to  
switch to the internal display).  
Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details on using hot  
keys to change the display setting.  
Do not disconnect the external monitor when in Sleep or Hibernation  
Mode. Turn off the computer before disconnecting the external monitor.  
USB FDD Kit  
The USB floppy diskette drive accommodates either a 1.44MB or 720KB  
floppy diskette and connects to one of the computer's USB ports.  
USB connector  
Disk-In-Use  
Indicator  
Floppy  
diskette slot  
Eject button  
Figure 3-11 The USB floppy diskette drive  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-24  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Connecting the USB floppy diskette drive  
To connect the drive, plug the floppy diskette drive’s USB connector into a  
computer’s USB port.  
Make sure the connector is properly aligned with the socket. Do not try to  
force the connection, doing so can damage the connecting pins.  
USB connector  
USB port  
Figure 3-12 Connecting the USB floppy diskette drive  
If you connect the USB floppy diskette drive after the computer has already  
been turned on, it will take about ten seconds for it to be recognized by the  
computer. Do not attempt to disconnect and reconnect the drive before this  
period has elapsed.  
Disconnecting the USB floppy diskette drive  
When you have finished using the USB floppy diskette drive, you can follow  
the procedures below in order to disconnect it:  
1. Wait for the Disk-In-Use Indicator light to go out to make sure all floppy  
diskette activity has stopped.  
If you disconnect the USB floppy diskette drive or turn off the power while  
the computer is accessing the drive you may lose data or damage the  
floppy diskette or the drive.  
2. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Task Bar.  
3. Click the USB floppy diskette drive device that you want to remove.  
4. Carefully pull the floppy diskette drive's USB connector out from within  
the computer's USB port.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-25  
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) is used for high-speed data transfer for a range of  
compatible devices such as:  
■ Digital video cameras  
■ Hard disk drives  
■ MO drives  
■ Writable optical disc drives  
i.LINK uses a four-pin connector, which does not carry any electric current.  
External devices will need their own power supply to operate.  
Precautions  
■ Make a back-up of your data before transferring it to the computer.  
There is a possibility that the original data will be damaged. There is a  
particular risk that some frames will be deleted in the case of digital  
video transfer. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for such loss of data.  
■ Do not transfer data in areas where static electricity is easily generated  
or in areas subjected to electronic noise. Data can be destroyed.  
■ If you are transferring data through an IEEE1394 hub, do not connect or  
disconnect other devices from the hub during data transfer. There is a  
likelihood that data will be damaged. Connect all devices to the hub  
before you turn on the computer’s power.  
■ You may not use any copyrighted video or music data copied from a  
video camera except for your personal enjoyment.  
■ If you connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK  
device that is currently exchanging data with the computer, data frames  
might be dropped.  
■ Make sure data transfer has ended or turn off the computer, before you:  
■ Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from the computer.  
■ Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK device  
that is connected to the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-26  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Connecting  
1. Make sure the connectors are properly aligned and plug the i.LINK  
(IEEE1394) cable into the computer.  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
port  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
connector  
Figure 3-13 Connecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable into the computer  
2. Plug the other end of the cable into the device.  
Note the following when you use i.LINK:  
■ You may need to install drivers for your i.LINK devices.  
■ Not all i.LINK devices have been tested. Therefore, compatibility with all  
i.LINK devices cannot be guaranteed.  
■ Some devices might not support sleep or automatic off functions.  
■ Do not connect or disconnect an i.LINK device while it is using an  
application or when the computer is automatically shutting it down to  
save power. Data might be destroyed.  
Disconnecting  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.  
2. Point to i.LINK (IEEE1394) device and click.  
3. Disconnect the cable from the computer then from the i.LINK device.  
Refer also to the documentation that came with your i.LINK device.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-27  
   
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Serial port  
The serial connector can be used to connect to RS-232C compatible  
devices.  
RS-232C compatible devices include the following:  
■ Modem  
■ Mouse  
■ Printer  
To connect a serial port, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Turn the computer’s power off.  
2. Connect the serial connector to the serial port and tighten the screws on  
the left and right hand side.  
Serial port  
Serial connector  
Figure 3-14 Connecting the serial connector to the serial port  
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator  
In addition to the ports available on the computer, the TOSHIBA Express  
Port Replicator. The TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator connects directly to  
the docking interface on the underside of the computer. The AC adaptor  
connects the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator to a power source.  
The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN.  
Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings could cause a  
malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator  
regarding set-up procedures.  
■ You must connect the AC adaptor before you connect to a TOSHIBA  
Express Port Replicator.  
■ When a TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator is connected to the  
computer, you can not use the following computer’s ports: LAN jack,  
DC IN 15V jack and External monitor port.  
■ When connecting an AC Adaptor to the TOSHIBA Express Port  
Replicator, use only the AC Adaptor included with TOSHIBA Express  
Port Replicator. Do not use the computer’s AC Adaptor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-28  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
The following ports are available on the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator.  
■ RJ45 LAN jack  
■ External monitor port  
■ DC IN 15V jack  
■ Security lock slot  
■ Universal Serial Bus 2.0 port (four)  
■ DVI port  
■ Serial port  
■ As the port operation of all DVI (Digital Visual Interface) monitors has  
not been confirmed, some DVI monitors may not function properly.  
■ Set the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator's Slide Adjuster to SLIDE  
position #3 when connecting this computer to the TOSHIBA Express  
Port Replicator. Refer to the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator User's  
Manual for more details on connection methods.  
Security lock  
A security locks enable you to anchor your computer a desk or other heavy  
object in order to help prevent unauthorized removal or theft. The computer  
has a security lock slot on its left side into which you can attach one end of  
the security cable, while the other end attaches to a desk or similar object.  
The methods used for attaching security cables differ from product to  
product. Please refer to the instructions for the product you are using for  
more information.  
Connecting the security lock  
In order to connect a security cable to the computer, follow the steps as  
detailed below:  
1. Turn the computer so its left hand side faces you.  
2. Align the security cable with the 'lock hole' and secure it in place.  
Security lock slot  
Figure 3-15 Security lock  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-29  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Optional accessories  
You are able to add a number of options and accessories in order to make  
your computer even more powerful and convenient to use. For reference,  
the following list details some of the items that are available from your  
reseller or TOSHIBA dealer:  
DDR2-667 Memory  
Module  
A 256MB, 512MB, 1,024MB or 2,048MB memory  
module (DDR2-667) can be easily installed in the  
computer.  
Universal AC  
Adaptor  
If you frequently use your computer at more than  
one site, it may be convenient to purchase an  
additional AC adaptor to be kept at each site in  
order to remove the need to always carry the  
adaptor with you.  
Battery Pack  
An additional battery pack can be purchased for  
use as either a spare or replacement. Please  
refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes  
for further information.  
High Capacity  
Battery Pack  
An additional battery pack can be purchased for  
use as either a spare or replacement.  
Extended Capacity  
Battery Pack  
An additional battery pack can be purchased for  
use as either a spare or replacement.  
Battery Charger  
The optional battery charger allows you to  
charge extra battery packs outside of having to  
use the computer.  
USB FDD Kit  
The USB floppy diskette drive accommodates  
either a 1.44MB or 720KB floppy diskette through  
connection to one of the computer's USB ports.  
In use, please be aware that, while you cannot  
format 720KB floppy diskettes under Windows  
VistaTM, you are able to read and write to  
diskettes that have already been formatted.  
TOSHIBA Express  
Port Replicator  
The TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator provides  
the ports available on the computer in addition to  
a digital visual interface (DVI) port, External  
monitor port, four Universal Serial Bus ports  
(USB 2.0) and a LAN jack.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-30  
       
Chapter 4  
Operating Basics  
This chapter describes the basic operations of your computer, highlights  
the precautions that should be taken when using it.  
TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device  
The computer is equipped with a dual point system: a Touch Pad and an  
AccuPoint pointing stick.  
Using the Touch Pad  
To use the Touch Pad, simply touch and move your fingertip across it in the  
direction you want the on-screen pointer to go.  
AccuPoint  
AccuPoint  
control buttons  
Touch Pad  
control buttons  
Touch Pad  
Figure 4-1 Touch Pad and Touch Pad control buttons  
The two buttons below the Touch Pad are used like the buttons on a  
standard mouse - press the left button to select a menu item or to  
manipulate text or graphics designated by the pointer, and press the right  
button to display a menu or other function depending on the software you  
are using.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1  
               
Operating Basics  
You can also tap the Touch Pad to perform functions similar to those of the  
left button on a standard mouse.  
Click: Tap once  
Double-click: Tap twice  
Drag and drop: Tap twice to select the item(s) you want to move.  
Move the item(s) to the new desitination and then leave your finger on  
the Touch Pad.  
Using the AccuPoint  
To use the AccuPoint, simply push it with your finger tip in the direction you  
want to move the on-screen pointer.  
Two buttons above the Touch Pad work in the same way with the AccuPoint  
as they do with the Touch Pad. Refer to the Using the Touch Pad section  
for details.  
Only some models are equipped with the AccuPoint.  
AccuPoint precautions  
Certain conditions can affect the on-screen pointer when using AccuPoint.  
For example, the pointer may travel contrary to AccuPoint operation or an  
error message may appear, if  
■ You touch the AccuPoint during power-up.  
■ You apply constant, soft pressure during power-up.  
■ There is a sudden temperature change.  
■ Strong stress is applied to the AccuPoint.  
If an error message appears, reboot the computer. If an error message  
does not appear, wait a moment for the pointer to stop, then continue  
operation.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2  
   
Operating Basics  
Replacing the cap  
The AccuPoint cap is an expendable item that should be replaced after  
prolonged use. The spare AccuPoint cap is supplied with the computer.  
1. To remove the AccuPoint cap, firmly pinch the cap and pull it straight  
up.  
AccuPoint cap  
Figure 4-2 Removing the AccuPoint cap  
2. Position a new cap on the peg and press it into place.  
The peg is square, so be careful to align the cap’s square hole with the  
peg.  
Using the Fingerprint Sensor  
This product has a fingerprint utility installed for the purpose of enrolling  
and recognizing fingerprints. By enrolling the ID and password onto the  
fingerprint authentication feature, it is no longer necessary to input the  
password from the keyboard. Fingerprint feature enables you to:  
■ Logon to Windows and access a security enabled homepage through  
Internet Explorer.  
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted and third party access to  
them prevented.  
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver when returning from a  
power-saving mode such as Sleep Mode.  
■ Authentication of the User Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard  
Disk Drive) Password) when booting up the computer (Power-on  
Security).  
■ Single Sign-on facility  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3  
     
Operating Basics  
How to Swipe your Finger  
Using the following steps when swiping fingers for fingerprint registration or  
authentication will help to minimize authentication failures:  
Align the first joint of the finger at the center of the sensor, then lightly touch  
the sensor and swipe finger horizontally towards you until the sensor  
surface becomes visible. In performing this process, you should also take  
care to ensure that the center of your fingerprint is on the sensor.  
The following illustrations show the recommended way to swipe your finger  
over the fingerprint sensor.  
Sensor  
Sensor  
Figure 4-3 Swipe the finger  
■ Avoid swiping with your finger stiff or pressed too hard onto the sensor,  
and take care to ensure that the center of the fingerprint is touching the  
sensor before swiping. Either of these conditions may cause fingerprint  
reading to fail.  
■ Check the center of the fingerprint whirl before swiping and then  
ensure this is swiped along the center line of the sensor.  
■ There is a possibility of authentication failures if the finger is swiped too  
quickly or too slowly - follow any on-screen instructions to adjust the  
speed used during the swipe process.  
Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor  
Please be aware of the following considerations when using the fingerprint  
sensor. A failure to follow these guidelines might result in damage to the  
sensor, sensor failure, fingerprint recognition problems or a lower  
fingerprint recognition success rate.  
■ Do not scratch or poke the sensor with your nails or any hard or sharp  
objects.  
■ Do not press the sensor strongly.  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a wet finger or any wet objects - keep the  
sensor surface dry and free from water vapor.  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a soiled or dirty finger as minute foreign  
particles of dust and dirt may scratch it.  
■ Do not paste stickers or write on the sensor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4  
Operating Basics  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a finger or any other object which may  
have a build-up of static electricity on it.  
Observe the following before you place your finger on the sensor whether  
for fingerprint enrollment/registration or recognition.  
■ Wash and dry your hands thoroughly.  
■ Remove static electricity from your fingers by touching any metal  
surface. Static electricity is a common cause of sensor failures,  
especially when the weather is dry.  
■ Clean the sensor with a lint-free cloth - do not use detergent or any  
other chemicals to clean the sensor.  
■ Avoid the following finger conditions for enrollment or recognition as  
they may result in fingerprint enrollment errors or a drop in the  
fingerprint recognition success rate  
■ Soaked or swollen finger, for example as may occur after taking a  
bath.  
■ Injured finger  
■ Wet finger  
■ Soiled or oily finger  
■ Extremely dry skin condition on finger  
Observe the following to improve the fingerprint recognition success rate.  
■ Enroll two or more fingers.  
■ Enroll additional fingers if a recognition failure often occurs when using  
already enrolled fingers.  
■ Check the condition of your finger - any conditions which have changed  
since enrollment, such as injury, rough skin, and extremely dry, wet,  
soiled, dirty, oily, soaked or swollen fingers, may lower the recognition  
success rate. Also if the fingerprint is worn down or the finger becomes  
thinner or fatter, the recognition success rate may be lowered.  
■ As the fingerprint for each finger is different and unique you should  
ensure that only the registered or enrolled fingerprint or fingerprints are  
used for identification.  
■ Check the position and speed at which you swipe your finger across the  
sensor - please refer to the preceding drawing.  
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique  
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where  
certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient  
unique characteristics in their fingerprints.  
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-5  
Operating Basics  
How to Delete the Fingerprint Data  
Saved fingerprint data is stored in special non-volatile memory inside the  
fingerprint sensor. Therefore, if you give the computer to someone else, or  
dispose of it in any way, the following process is recommended to delete  
your fingerprint information:  
1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> Protector Suite QL  
-> Control Center.  
2. The Protector Suite Software screen is displayed.  
3. Click Fingerprints and click Delete.  
4. Click Settings and click Fingerprint Storage Inspector.  
5. The Fingerprint Storage Inspector screen will be displayed. If  
fingerprint data is displayed as part of the list, simply select all of this  
information and then Remove.  
6. Check whether all of the fingerprint data was deleted on the  
Fingerprint Storage Inspector screen.  
In use, please be aware of the following limitations of the fingerprint sensor:  
■ A warning message will be displayed when recognition is abnormal or  
recognition is not successful within a fixed duration.  
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique  
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances that  
certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient  
unique characteristics in their fingerprints.  
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.  
■ Toshiba does not guarantee that this fingerprint recognition technology  
will be error-free.  
■ Toshiba does not guarantee that the fingerprint sensor will recognize  
the enrolled user or accurately screen out unauthorized users at all  
times. Toshiba is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise out  
of the use of this fingerprint recognition software or utility.  
Points to note about the Fingerprint Utility software  
You are able to backup saved fingerprint data and information within the  
PasswordBank by using the Import or Export User Data facility under the  
fingerprint management software. However, please be aware that any  
encrypted files cannot be backup within FileSafe using this function - in  
these instances it is recommended that you backup these files to external  
media using standard file copy processes.  
The Encrypting File System (EFS) is a Windows VistaTM feature.  
If a file is encrypted using EFS, it cannot be encrypted further using the  
fingerprint authentication function.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-6  
Operating Basics  
If both the fingerprint sensor and Trusted Platform Module (TPM) security  
are used as identification devices, you must install and configure the  
Infineon TPM Professional package first before you setup and configure the  
fingerprint utility. Please refer to the TPM (Trusted Platform Module)  
Installation Guide for further information on the installation and  
configuration considerations relating to TPM.  
In the Help File, it is stated that this software's PasswordBank function can  
be used for managing security relating to the Internet as well as for general  
applications. However, please be aware that the Internet PasswordBank  
function within the fingerprint utility provided on this computer can only be  
used with Microsoft's Internet Explorer software.  
Set Up Procedure  
Please use the following procedure when first using fingerprint  
authentication.  
Fingerprint Registration  
You should initially enroll the required authentication data using the User  
Enrollment Wizard.  
■ In use, the fingerprint authentication system will use the same  
username and password as defined within the Windows operating  
system. If no Windows password has been configured, you must do  
this before starting the fingerprint registration process.  
■ Up to twenty-one fingerprint patterns can be registered on this sensor.  
1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> Protector Suite QL  
-> User Enrollment.  
You are also able to start the User Enrollment Wizard by using the  
following methods.  
■ Click the Protector Suite QL icon in the Task Bar.  
■ Swipe your finger across the Fingerprint Sensor.  
2. Click Next.  
3. At the User's Password screen which is then displayed, you should  
ensure that the same Windows username is displayed before entering  
the appropriate password into the Enter your password field. Once  
this has been done, click Next.  
4. At the Hints for Fingerprint Enrollment screen, confirm the message  
displayed and ensure that there is a check mark in the Run Interactive  
Tutorial box. Once this has been done, click Next.  
5. At the Correct Swipe Procedure screen, confirm the message that is  
displayed and then click Next.  
6. At the Scanning Practice screen, you are able to practice swiping your  
finger to ensure you use the correct method. Once you have finished  
practicing, click Next.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7  
Operating Basics  
7. At the User's Fingers screen, select the finger that you wish to enroll  
from the illustration and then click Next. On this screen please be  
aware that any previously enrolled fingerprints would have green check  
marks, while the fingerprint that you are about to enroll will have a red  
check mark. If any of the previously enrolled fingerprints is selected  
again, the latest information will be enrolled and any previous  
information over-written.  
8. At Advanced Security screen, select whether you wish to enable the  
security function, and then click Next.  
9. At Finalization screen, click Finish - this will complete the fingerprint  
registration process.  
Windows Logon via Fingerprint Authentication  
If required, you are also able to use fingerprint authentication in place of the  
usual Windows logon process using your username and password. This  
method is especially useful where there are many users using the same  
computer as it removes the need for actual user selection when the system  
is started.  
Fingerprint Authentication Procedure  
1. Start up the computer.  
2. At the Logon Authorization screen, choose any of the enrolled fingers  
and swipe the fingerprint on the sensor - if the authentication process is  
successful, the user will automatically be logged in to Windows.  
If the fingerprint authentication process fails you will need to log into  
Windows using the appropriate username and password. In addition, you  
should use this manual login process if fingerprint authentication fails for  
three consecutive tries - a warning message will be displayed when  
authentication is not normal or is not successful within a fixed duration.  
Fingerprint Power-on Security  
General  
The fingerprint authentication system can be used to replace the keyboard  
based password authentication system that is used when the computer is  
turned on.  
If you do not want to use the fingerprint authentication system for password  
authentication when the computer is turned on, but instead prefer to use  
the keyboard entry method instead, simply press the BkSP (backspace)  
key when the Fingerprint Power-on Security screen is displayed. Using this  
process will switch the password input screen across to the keyboard  
based entry screen.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-8  
Operating Basics  
■ You must ensure that you use the TOSHIBA Password Utility to  
register a User Password before using the Fingerprint Power-on  
Security and its extended function to allow fingerprints to be used to  
access the computer when it is turned on.  
■ If the fingerprint authentication process fails five times, a preset time  
limit is exceeded, or you press the BkSP (backspace) key, [Password  
=] will be displayed on the screen and you will have to enter either the  
User Password or Supervisor Password manually in order to start the  
computer.  
■ When swiping your finger, please ensure that you do it slowly and at a  
constant speed. If you find that this does not improve the authentication  
rate, you should try to adjust the speed at which the finger is swiped.  
■ If there are any changes in the environment or settings related to  
authorization, you will be required to provide authorization information  
such as a User Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive)  
password).  
How to Enable Fingerprint Power-on Security Settings  
It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Protector Suite QL  
application prior to enabling and configuring the Fingerprint Power-on  
Security System. You should check that your fingerprint is enrolled before  
configuring the settings (please refer to the Manual for Fingerprint  
Registration/Enrollment for further instructions).  
1. Swipe your finger across the fingerprint sensor.  
2. MENU will appear in the lower right corner of the screen. Swipe your  
finger on the fingerprint sensor and then select Control Center from the  
items presented in this menu.  
3. At the Fingerprint Software Management screen, click Settings and  
then click Power-on Security.  
4. At the Power-on Security screen, place a check mark in the Replace  
the power-on and hard disk drive passwords with the fingerprint reader  
setting and then click OK.  
Fingerprint Single Sign-on Feature  
General  
This is a feature that allows the user to complete the authentication for both  
the User/BIOS Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive)  
Password) and logging onto Windows using only one fingerprint  
authentication when booting up. It is necessary to register the User/BIOS  
Password and Windows Logon Password before using the Fingerprint  
Power-on Security and this Fingerprint Single Sign-on Feature. Please use  
the TOSHIBA Password Utility to register your User/BIOS Password. If  
Windows Logon is not the default for your system, see Manual to register  
your Windows Logon Password.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-9  
Operating Basics  
Only one fingerprint authentication is required to replace the User/BIOS  
Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive) Password) and the  
Windows Logon Password.  
How to Enable Fingerprint Single Sign-on Feature  
It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Protector Suite QL  
application prior to enabling and configuring the Fingerprint Single Sign-on  
feature. You should check that your fingerprint is enrolled before  
configuring the settings (please refer to the Manual for Fingerprint  
Registration/Enrollment for further instructions).  
1. Swipe your finger across the fingerprint sensor.  
2. MENU will appear in the lower right corner of the screen. Swipe your  
finger on the fingerprint sensor and then select Control Center from the  
items presented in this menu.  
3. At the Fingerprint Software Management screen, click Settings and  
then click System Settings.  
4. At the Protector Suite Settings screen, place a check mark in the  
Allow power-on security single sign-on setting within Enable logon  
support and then click OK.  
Fingerprint utility limitations  
TOSHIBA does not guarantee that the fingerprint utility technology will be  
completely secure or error-free, or that it will accurately screen out  
unauthorized users at all times. TOSHIBA is not liable for any failure or  
damage that might arise out of the use of the fingerprint software.  
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique  
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where  
certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient  
unique characteristics in their fingerprints.  
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.  
Using optical disc drives  
The full-size drive provides high-performance execution of CD/DVD-ROM-  
based programs. You can run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15")  
CD/DVDs without an adaptor. An ATAPI interface controller is used for  
CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the computer is accessing a CD/DVD-  
ROM, an indicator on the drive glows.  
Use the WinDVD application to view DVD-Video discs.  
If you have a DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive, refer also to the Writing CDs on  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive section for precautions on writing to CDs.  
If you have a DVD Super Multi drive, refer also to the Writing CD/DVDs on  
DVD Super Multi drives section for precautions on writing to CDs/DVDs.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-10  
       
Operating Basics  
Loading discs  
To load CD/DVDs, follow the steps below.  
1. When the computer’s power is on, press the eject button to open  
the disc tray slightly.  
2. Grasp the disc tray gently and pull until it is fully opened.  
Disc tray  
Figure 4-4 Pressing the eject button and pulling the disc tray open  
3. Lay the CD/DVD, label side up, in the disc tray.  
Laser lens  
Figure 4-5 Inserting a CD/DVD  
When the disc tray is fully opened, the edge of the computer will extend  
slightly over the CD/DVD tray. Therefore, you will need to turn the CD/DVD  
at an angle when you place it in the disc tray. After seating the CD/DVD,  
however, make sure it lies flat.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-11  
Operating Basics  
■ Do not touch the laser lens or any portion of its surrounding casing as  
this could cause misalignment.  
■ Prevent foreign objects from entering the drive. Check the surface of  
the disc tray, especially the area behind the front edge of the disc tray,  
to make sure there are no such objects before closing the drive.  
4. Press gently at the center of the CD/DVD until you feel it click into  
place. The CD/DVD should lie below the top of the spindle, flush with  
the spindle base.  
5. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into  
place.  
If the CD/DVD is not seated properly when the disc tray is closed, the  
CD/DVD might be damaged. Also, the disc tray might not open fully when  
you press the eject button.  
Figure 4-6 Closing the CD/DVD disc tray  
Removing discs  
To remove the CD/DVD, follow the steps below.  
Do not press the eject button while the computer is accessing the media  
drive. Wait for the optical disc drive indicator to go out before you open the  
disc tray. Also, if the CD/DVD is spinning when you open the disc tray, wait  
for it to stop before you remove it.  
1. To pop the disc tray partially open, press the eject button. Gently pull  
the disc tray out until it is fully opened.  
When the disc tray pops open slightly, wait a moment to make sure the  
CD/DVD has stopped spinning before pulling the disc tray fully open.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-12  
Operating Basics  
2. The CD/DVD extends slightly over the sides of the disc tray so you can  
grasp it. Gently lift out the CD/DVD.  
Figure 4-7 Removing a CD/DVD  
3. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into  
place.  
How to remove CD/DVD when the disc tray will not open  
Pressing the eject button will not open the disc tray when the computer  
power is off. If the power is off, you can open the disc tray by inserting a  
slender object (about 15 mm) such as a straightened paper clip into the  
eject hole near the eject button.  
Eject hole  
Figure 4-8 Manual release with the eject hole  
Turn off the power before you use the eject hole. If the CD/DVD is spinning  
when you open the disc tray, the CD/DVD could fly off the spindle and  
cause injury.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-13  
Operating Basics  
Writing CDs on DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive  
Depending on the type of drive installed, you may be able to write CDs. The  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive lets you write as well as read CD-ROMs.  
Observe the precautions in this section to ensure the best performance for  
writing CDs. For information on loading and unloading CDs refer to the  
Media care section.  
■ Refer to the Writable discs, Chapter 2 for the details about the types of  
writable CD/DVD discs.  
■ Do not turn off the power of the optical disc drive while the computer is  
accessing the drive. If you turn off the power, you may lose data.  
When writing information to media using an optical drive, you should  
always ensure that you connect the AC adaptor to a power plug socket. It  
is possible that, if data is written when powered by the battery pack, the  
write process may sometimes fail due to low battery power - in these  
instances data loss may occur.  
Before writing or rewriting  
Please observe the following points when you write or rewrite the data.  
■ We recommend the following manufacturers of CD-R and CD-RW  
media. Media quality can affect write or rewrite success rates.  
CD-R:  
TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
Multi-Speed and High-Speed CD-RW:  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
Ultra-Speed CD-RW:  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
TOSHIBA has confirmed the operation of CD-R and CD-RW media of the  
manufacturers above. Operation of other media cannot be guaranteed.  
■ The actual number of rewrites to CD-RW media is affected by the  
quality of the disc and the way it is used.  
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor when you write or rewrite.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-14  
   
Operating Basics  
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except the writing  
software.  
■ Do not run software such as a screen saver which can put a heavy load  
on the CPU.  
■ Operate the computer at its full power setting - do not use any power-  
saving features.  
■ Do not write information while virus checking software is running,  
instead waiting for it to finish, then disable the virus protection  
applications, including any software that checks files automatically in  
the background.  
■ Do not use any hard disk utilities, including those intended to enhance  
hard disk drive access speeds. They may cause unstable operation and  
damage data.  
■ Write from the computer's hard disk drive to the CD. Do not try to write  
from shared devices such as a LAN server or any other network device.  
■ Writing with software other than TOSHIBA Disc Creator has not been  
confirmed. Therefore, operation with other software application cannot  
be guaranteed.  
When writing or rewriting  
Please observe the following points when you write or rewrite data to CD-R  
or CD-RW media.  
■ Always copy data from the hard disk drive to the optical disc. Do not use  
cut-and-paste as the original data will be lost if there is a write error.  
■ Do not perform any of the following actions:  
■ Change users in the Windows Vista™ operating system.  
■ Operate the computer for any other function, including use of a  
mouse or Touch Pad, closing/opening the LCD panel.  
■ Start a communication application such as a modem.  
■ Apply impact or vibration to the computer.  
■ Install, remove or connect external devices, including such items as  
a PC card, SD card, SDHC card, Memory Stick/Memory Stick  
PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo, xD picture card, MultiMediaCard,  
USB devices, external monitor, i.LINK devices and optical digital  
devices.  
■ Open the optical disc drive.  
■ If the media is poor in quality, dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting  
errors may occur.  
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to  
vibration such as airplanes, trains or cars. Do not use an unstable  
surface such as a stand.  
■ Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away  
from the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-15  
Operating Basics  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drives  
You can use the DVD Super Multi drive to write data to either CD-R, CD-  
RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double  
Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM discs. The TOSHIBA Disc Creator is  
provided for writing.  
■ Please refer to the Writable discs, Chapter 2 for details about the types  
of writable CD and DVD discs that can be supported by this computer.  
■ Do not turn off the power to the optical disc drive while the computer is  
accessing it as this may cause you to lose data.  
■ To write data to CD-R/-RW media, use the TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
feature that is installed on your computer.  
When writing information to media using an optical drive, you should  
always ensure that you connect the AC adaptor to a live power socket. It is  
possible that, if data is written while powered by the battery pack, the write  
process may sometimes fail due to low battery power - in these instances  
data loss may occur.  
Important message  
Before you write or rewrite to any of the media supported by the DVD  
Super Multi Drive, please read and follow all of the setup and operating  
instructions in this section. If you fail to do so, you may find that the DVD  
Super Multi drive may not function properly, and you may fail to write or  
rewrite information successfully - this may cause you to either lose data or  
incur other damage to the drive or media.  
Legal Footnotes  
TOSHIBA does not bear responsibility for the following:  
■ Damage to any CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW,  
DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc that may  
be caused by writing or rewriting with this product.  
■ Any change or loss of the recorded contents of CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,  
DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer),  
DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media that may be caused by writing or  
rewriting with this product, or for any business profit loss or business  
interruption that may be caused by the change or loss of the recorded  
contents.  
■ Damage that may be caused by using third party equipment or  
software.  
Given the technological limitations of current optical disc writing drives, you  
may experience unexpected writing or rewriting errors due to disc quality or  
problems with hardware devices. In view of this, it is good practice to make  
two or more copies of important data, in case of any undesired change or  
loss of the recorded contents.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-16  
   
Operating Basics  
Before writing or rewriting  
■ Based on TOSHIBA's limited compatibility testing, we suggest the  
following manufacturers of CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual  
Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-  
RAM media, however, it must be noted that disc quality can affect write  
or rewrite success rates. Please also be aware that in no event does  
TOSHIBA guarantee the operation, quality or performance of any disc.  
CD-R:  
TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
CD-RW: (Multi-Speed and High-Speed)  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
CD-RW: (Ultra-Speed)  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
DVD-R:  
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for General Version 2.0  
TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd  
DVD-R (Dual Layer):  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
DVD+R:  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
DVD+R (Double Layer): (Double Layer Recordable drive only)  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
DVD-RW:  
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for Version 1.1 or version  
1.2  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN.LIMITED  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-17  
Operating Basics  
DVD+RW:  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
DVD-RAM: (DVD Super Multi drive only)  
DVD Specifications for DVD-RAM Disc for Version 2.0, Version 2.1  
or Version 2.2  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.  
Hitachi Maxell Ltd.  
■ This drive cannot use discs that allow writing faster than 16x speed  
(DVD-R and DVD+R media), 8x speed (DVD-R (Dual Layer),  
DVD+RW and DVD+R (Double Layer) media), 6x speed (DVD-RW  
media), 5x speed (DVD-RAM media).  
■ Some types and formats of DVD-R (Dual Layer) and DVD+R (Double  
Layer) discs may be unreadable.  
■ 2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM media cannot be read from or written to.  
■ DISC created in DVD-R (Dual Layer) format4 (Layer Jump Recording)  
cannot be read.  
■ If the disc is poor in quality, or is dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting  
errors may be noted - ensure that you check all discs for dirt or damage  
before you use them.  
■ The actual number of rewrites to CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-  
RAM media will be affected by the quality of the disc itself and the way  
in which it is used.  
■ There are two types of DVD-R media available, authoring discs and  
general use discs. Do not attempt to use authoring discs as only  
general use discs can be written to by a computer drive.  
■ You can use both DVD-RAM discs that can be removed from a cartridge  
and DVD-RAM discs designed without a cartridge.  
■ You may find that other computer DVD-ROM drives or other DVD  
players may not be able to read DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW,  
DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW discs.  
■ Data written to a CD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD+R or  
DVD+R (Double Layer) discs cannot be deleted either in whole or in  
part.  
■ Data deleted/erased from a CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM  
disc cannot be recovered. You must check the content of the disc  
carefully before you delete it, taking care that, if multiple drives that can  
write data to discs are connected, you do not delete data from the  
wrong one.  
■ In writing to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R  
(Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media, some space is required  
for file management, so you may not be able to write to the full capacity  
of the disc.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-18  
Operating Basics  
■ Since the disc is based on the DVD standard, it might be filled with  
dummy data if the written data is less than about 1GB. Therefore, in  
these circumstance, even if you write only a small amount of data, it  
might take additional time to fill in the dummy data.  
■ When multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected, be  
sure that you do not write to or delete data from the wrong drive.  
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor to the computer before you write or  
rewrite any information.  
■ Before you enter either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode, take care to  
ensure that any DVD-RAM writing has been completed. In this instance,  
writing is finished if you can eject the DVD-RAM media.  
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except for the writing  
software itself.  
■ Do not run software such as a screen saver which can put a heavy load  
on the processor.  
■ Operate the computer at its full power settings - do not use any power-  
saving features.  
■ Do not write information while virus checking software is running,  
instead wait for it to finish, then disable the virus protection applications,  
including any software that checks files automatically in the  
background.  
■ Do not use any hard disk utilities, including those that are intended to  
enhance hard disk drive access speeds, as they may cause unstable  
operation and damage data.  
■ CD-RW (Ultra Speed +) media should not be used as data may be lost  
or damaged.  
■ You should always write from the computer's hard disk drive onto the  
CD/DVD - do not try to write from shared devices such as a server or  
any other network device.  
■ Writing with software other than TOSHIBA Disc Creator has not been  
confirmed, therefore operation with other software applications cannot  
be guaranteed.  
When writing or rewriting  
Please observe the following points while you write or rewrite data to CD-R,  
CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double  
Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media:  
■ Always copy data from the hard disk drive to the optical media - do not  
use the cut-and-paste function as the original data will be lost if there is  
a write error.  
■ Do not perform any of the following actions:  
■ Change users in the Windows VistaTM operating system.  
■ Operate the computer for any other function, including such tasks as  
using a mouse or Touch Pad, or closing/opening the display panel.  
■ Start a communication application such as a modem.  
■ Apply impact or vibration to the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-19  
Operating Basics  
■ Install, remove or connect external devices, including such items as  
a PC Card, SD Card, SDHC card, Memory Stick/ Memory Stick  
PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo, xD picture card, MultiMediaCard,  
USB devices, external monitor, i.LINK devices, or optical digital  
devices.  
■ Use the audio/video control button to reproduce music or voice.  
■ Open the optical disc drive.  
■ Do not use shut down, log off, Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode  
functions while writing or rewriting.  
■ Make sure that the write/rewrite operation is completed before going  
into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode (writing is completed if you  
can remove an optical media on the DVD Super Multi drive).  
■ If the media is of poor quality, or is dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting  
errors may occur.  
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to  
vibration such as airplanes, trains or cars. In addition, do not use the  
computer on an unstable surface such as a stand.  
■ Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away  
from the computer.  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
Please be aware of the following limitations when you use the TOSHIBA  
Disc Creator:  
■ DVD Video cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ DVD Audio cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot use TOSHIBA Disc Creator's 'Audio CD for Car or Home  
CD Player' function to record music to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer),  
DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW media.  
■ Do not use the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator in order  
to copy DVD Video or DVD-ROM material that has copyright protection.  
■ DVD-RAM discs cannot be backed up using the 'Disc Backup' function  
of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot back up CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW media to DVD-R, DVD-  
R (Dual Layer) or DVD-RW media using the 'Disc Backup' function of  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot back up CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW media to DVD+R,  
DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW media using the 'Disc Backup'  
function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot back up DVD-ROM, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual  
Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW to CD-  
R or CD-RW media using the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator.  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator cannot record in packet format.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-20  
 
Operating Basics  
■ You might not be able to use the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA  
Disc Creator to back up a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW,  
DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW disc that was made with  
other software on a different optical media recorder.  
■ If you add data to a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD+R or DVD+R  
(Double Layer) disc that you have already recorded to, you might not be  
able to read the added data under some circumstances. For example, it  
cannot be read under 16-bit operating systems, such as Windows 98SE  
and Windows Me, while in Windows NT4 you will need Service Pack 6  
or later, and in Windows 2000, you will need Service Pack 2. In addition  
to this, some DVD-ROM and DVD-ROM / CD-R/RW drives cannot read  
this added data regardless of the operating system.  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator does not support recording to DVD-RAM discs -  
to achieve this you should use Windows Explorer or another similar  
utility.  
■ When you back up a DVD disc, be sure that the source drive supports  
recording to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R  
(Double Layer) or DVD+RW media - if this is not the case then the  
source disc might not be backed up correctly.  
■ When you back up a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R,  
DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW disc, be sure to use the same type  
of disc.  
■ You cannot partially delete any data written to a CD-RW, DVD-RW or  
DVD+RW disc.  
Data Verification  
To verify that data has been written or rewritten correctly to a data CD/DVD  
you should follow the steps below before you begin the write/rewrite  
process:  
1. Display the setting dialog box by one of the following two steps:  
■ Click the setting button (  
) for writing on the main toolbar in the  
Data CD/DVD mode.  
■ Select Setting for writing -> Data CD/DVD in the Setting menu.  
2. Mark the Verify written data check box.  
3. Select File Open or Full Compare mode.  
4. Click the OK button.  
How to learn more about TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
Please refer to the Help files for additional TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
information.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-21  
Operating Basics  
Media care  
This section provides tips on protecting data stored on your CD's, DVD's  
and floppy diskettes. Handle your media with care. Following the simple  
precautions listed below will increase the lifetime of your media and protect  
the data stored on it.  
CD/DVDs  
1. Store your CD's and DVD's in the containers they originally came in to  
protect them and keep them clean.  
2. Do not bend the CD's or DVD's.  
3. Do not write on, apply a sticker to, or otherwise mar the surface of the  
CD or DVD that contains the data.  
4. Hold the CD or DVD by its outside edge or the edge on the center hole -  
any fingerprints on the surface of the disc can prevent the drive from  
properly reading data.  
5. Do not expose the CD or DVD to direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.  
6. Do not place heavy objects on your CD's or DVD's.  
7. If your CD's or DVD's become dusty or dirty, wipe them with a clean dry  
cloth from the center hole outwards - do not wipe in a circular direction.  
If necessary, you can use a cloth that has been lightly dampened in  
water or a neutral cleaner but you must not use benzine, thinner or any  
similar cleaning solution.  
Floppy diskettes  
The USB floppy diskette drive is available only as an option.  
1. Store your floppy diskettes in the container they came in to protect them  
and keep them clean. If a floppy diskette becomes dirty, clean it with a  
soft, lightly dampened cloth - do not use cleaning fluid.  
2. Never open the shutter or touch the magnetic surface of your floppy  
diskette - doing this could permanently damage it and lose data.  
3. Always handle floppy diskettes with care to prevent the loss of stored  
data.  
4. Always apply the floppy diskette label in the correct location and never  
apply a new label on top of an existing one - in this instance the label  
could come loose and damage the floppy diskette drive.  
5. Never use a pencil for writing on a floppy diskette label as the dust from  
the pencil lead could cause a system malfunction if it found its way onto  
the computer's components. In this instance, always use a felt-tipped  
pen and write the label first before applying it to the floppy diskette.  
6. Never put a floppy diskette in a location where water or other liquid may  
make contact with it, or where it is excessively damp - either of these  
conditions could cause data loss.  
7. Never use a wet or damp floppy diskette - this could damage the floppy  
diskette drive or other devices within the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-22  
           
Operating Basics  
8. Data may be lost if the floppy diskette is twisted, bent, or exposed to  
direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.  
9. Do not place heavy objects on your floppy diskettes.  
10. Do not eat, smoke, or use items such as erasers near your floppy  
diskettes as foreign particles inside the jacket of the floppy diskette can  
damage the magnetic surface.  
11. Magnetic energy can destroy the data on your floppy diskettes. In view  
of this you should keep your floppy diskettes away from speakers,  
radios, televisions and other sources of magnetic fields.  
Sound System  
This section describes some of the audio control functions.  
Volume Mixer  
The Volume Mixer utility lets you control the audio volume for playback of  
devices and applications under Windows.  
■ To launch the Volume Mixer utility, right click on the speaker icon on the  
taskbar, and select Open Volume Mixer from the sub menu.  
■ To adjust the volume level of speakers or headphones, move the  
Speakers slider.  
■ To adjust the volume level of an application that you are using, move  
the slider for the corresponding application.  
Microphone Level  
Follow the steps below to change the microphone recording level.  
1. Right click on the speaker icon on the taskbar, and select Recording  
Devices from the sub menu.  
2. Select Microphone, and click Properties.  
3. On the Levels tab move the Microphone slider to increase or decrease  
the microphone volume level.  
If you feel the microphone volume level is inadequate, move the  
Microphone Boost slider to a higher level.  
PC Beep Level  
Follow the steps below to change the PC Beep playback level.  
1. Right click on the speaker icon on the taskbar, and select Playback  
Devices in the sub menu.  
2. Select Speakers, and click Properties.  
3. On the Levels tab move the PC Beep slider to increase or decrease the  
PC Beep volume level.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-23  
   
Operating Basics  
Audio Enhancements  
In order to apply the sound effects for your current speaker, follow the steps  
below.  
1. Right click on the speaker icon on the taskbar, and select Playback  
Devices from the sub menu.  
2. Select Speakers, and click Properties.  
3. On the Enhancement tab select the sound effects you would like, and  
click Apply.  
Realtek HD Audio Manager  
The Realtek HD Audio Manager provides you a user interface to change  
various audio configuration settings. Some of the Realtek HD Audio  
Manager functions can also be accessed via the Sound properties in the  
control panel.  
The Environment, Equalizer, Karaoke, and Power Management  
functions can only be accessed via the Realtek HD Audio Manager.  
Environment  
You can select 23 kinds of sound effects using the pull down menu in the  
Environment pane. Five standard effects, Sweeper Pipe, Bathroom,  
Arena, Stone Room, and Auditorium, can be accessed via picture buttons.  
Equalizer  
You can select 12 kinds of optimized settings for equalization using the pull  
down menu in the Equalizer pane. Four standard settings, Pop, Live, Club,  
and Rock, can be accessed via buttons.  
Karaoke  
The Karaoke function eliminates voices from sounds. Use the Up and the  
Down arrow buttons to adjust key in which a sound is played.  
Power Management  
The audio controller in your computer can be powered down when the  
audio is not used. Click the battery button on the lower right of the Realtek  
HD Audio Manager to configure audio power management settings.  
■ The circle button on the top left of the Power Management window will  
appear blue when audio power management in enabled.  
■ Audio power management is disabled if the button appears black.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-24  
Operating Basics  
TOSHIBA Mic Effect  
TOSHIBA Mic Effect provides you with a hands-free environment for  
holding mutual communication via the Internet Protocol or Local Area  
Network. If you wish to communicate with someone on your computer, you  
can use a messenger application. However, with such an application, you  
would hear your own voice returning to you as echo during the  
communication if you did not use a headset system or headphone.  
TOSHIBA Mic Effect will reduce these echoes generated on your computer.  
To apply the echo cancellation, follow the steps below.  
1. Click the right button of a mouse on the speaker icon on the taskbar,  
and select Playback Devices in the sub menu.  
2. On the Playback tab, select Speakers, and click Properties.  
3. On the Advanced tab, select “16 bit, 48000 Hz (DVD Quality)” in the  
pull-down menu of Default Format, and then click OK.  
4. On the Recording tab, select Microphone, and click Properties.  
5. On the Advanced tab, select “2 channel, 16 bit, 48000 Hz (DVD  
Quality)” in the pull-down menu of the Default Format pane.  
6. On the TOSHIBA Mic Effect tab, select the Enable Echo Canceller  
check box, and click Apply.  
TOSHIBA Mic Effect cannot be used in the models that are not equipped  
with a built-in microphone.  
Modem  
This section describes how to connect and disconnect the internal modem  
to and from a telephone jack.  
Click the icon with the secondary mouse button to display the properties  
menu on the screen.  
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line  
could cause a computer system failure.  
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a  
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for  
residences or offices.  
■ Never operate your computer on AC power during a thunderstorm. If  
you see lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the computer.  
An electric surge caused by the storm, may result in a system failure,  
loss of data or hardware damage.  
■ Modem can not be used in model that does not have a modem device.  
User’s Manual  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Basics  
Region selection  
Telecommunication regulations vary from one region to another, so you will  
need to make sure the internal modem’s settings are correct for the region  
in which it will be used.  
The built-in modem can be used only in specified countries and regions.  
Using the modem in an area not specified for use may cause a system  
failure. Check the specified areas carefully before using it.  
To select a region, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Networking -> Modem  
Region Select.  
If it is available, do not use the Country/Region Select function included as  
part of the modem setup utility within the Control Panel - if you change the  
country/region setting this way you may find that the change does not take  
effect.  
2. The Region Selection icon will appear in the Windows Task Bar.  
3. Click the icon with the primary (left) mouse button to display a list of  
regions that the modem supports, together with a sub-menu which  
details telephony location information - a check mark will appear next to  
the currently selected region and telephony location.  
4. Select either a region from the region menu or a telephony location from  
the sub-menu.  
■ When you click a region it becomes the modem's default selection  
for any new dialling locations that are created within the Windows  
Control Panel (Phone and Modem Options).  
■ When you select a telephony location, the corresponding region is  
automatically selected and becomes the modem's default setting.  
Properties menu  
Click the icon with the secondary (right) mouse button in order to display a  
Properties menu on the screen.  
Setting  
Within the Properties menu you can are able to either enable or disable the  
following settings:  
AutoRun Mode  
Allows you to configure whether the Modem Region Select utility starts  
automatically whenever you start up the operating system.  
Open the Dialing Properties dialog box after selecting region.  
Allows you to configure whether the dialing properties dialog box will be  
displayed automatically after you have selected a region.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-26  
   
Operating Basics  
Location list for region selection.  
Displays a sub-menu appears which details location information.  
Open dialog box, if the modem and Telephony Current  
Location region code do not match.  
Displays a warning if the current settings for both region code and  
telephony location are different.  
Modem Selection  
If the computer cannot recognize the internal modem, a dialog box is  
displayed from which you should select the appropriate communications  
port for your modem to use.  
Dialing Properties  
You should select this item in order to display the dialing properties.  
If you are using the computer in Japan, the Telecommunications Business  
Law requires that you select Japan region mode. It is illegal to use the  
modem in Japan with any other selection.  
Connecting the modular cable  
To connect the modem's modular cable, follow the steps as detailed below:  
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line  
could cause a computer system failure.  
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a  
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for  
residences or offices.  
■ Never operate your computer on AC power during a thunderstorm. If  
you see lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the computer.  
An electric surge caused by the storm, may result in a system failure,  
loss of data or hardware damage.  
1. Plug the end of the modular cable into the computer's modem jack.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-27  
 
Operating Basics  
2. Plug the other end of the modular cable into a telephone jack.  
Modular cable  
Telephone jack  
Modem jack  
Figure 4-9 Connecting the internal modem  
Do not pull on the cable or move the computer while the cable is  
connected.  
If you use a storage device such as an optical drive or hard disk drive  
connected to a 16-bit PC Card, you might experience the following  
problems with the operation of the modem:  
■ The modem speed is slow or communication is periodically interrupted.  
■ Skips or jumps may be noted in sound.  
Disconnecting the modular cable  
To disconnect the internal modular cable, follow the steps as detailed  
below:  
1. Pinch the lever on the plug in the telephone jack and pull it out from  
within the connector.  
2. Pinch the lever on the plug in the computer's modem jack and pull it out  
from within the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-28  
 
Operating Basics  
Wireless communications  
The computer’s wireless communication function supports both Wireless  
LAN and Bluetooth devices.  
Only some models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth  
functions.  
■ Do not use the Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) or Bluetooth functionalities near a  
microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic  
fields. Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt  
Wi-Fi or Bluetooth operation.  
■ Turn Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functionalities off when near a person who  
may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric  
device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device  
operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of  
your medical device when using any Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionality.  
■ Always turn off Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionality if the computer is near  
automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or  
fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment,  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ It may not be possible to make a network connection to a specified  
network name using the ad hoc network function.  
If this occurs, the new network(*) will have to be configured for all  
computers connected to the same network in order to re-enable  
network connections.  
* Please be sure to use new network name.  
Wireless LAN  
The Wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct  
Sequence Spread Spectrum / Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing  
radio technology that complies with the IEEE802.11 Wireless LAN standard  
(Revision A, B, G or N Draft Ver. 1.0).  
Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on Wireless  
LAN is enabled.  
■ The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function consumes power even when  
the system is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this  
feature.  
■ The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function is effective only when it is  
connected with an Access Point. This function becomes invalid when  
the connection is broken.  
■ Frequency Channel Selection of 5GHz or 2.4GHz  
■ Roaming over multiple channels  
■ Card power management  
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption based on an 128-bit  
encryption algorithm  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-29  
     
Operating Basics  
■ Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)  
■ The values shown above are the theoretical maximums for Wireless  
LAN standards. The actual values may differ.  
■ The transmission speed over the wireless LAN, and the distance over  
which the wireless LAN can reach, may vary depending on surrounding  
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and  
configuration, client design and software/hardware configurations. The  
transmission rate described is the theoretical maximum speed as  
specified under the appropriate standard - the actual transmission  
speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed.  
Setting  
1. Please make sure that the Wireless Communication Switch is turned  
on.  
2. Click Start and then click Connect to to display Connect to a network  
window.  
3. Click Set up a connection or network.  
4. Follow the wizard. You will need the name of the wireless network  
together with security settings. Consult the documentation  
accompanied with your router or ask your wireless network  
administrator for the settings.  
Security  
■ TOSHIBA strongly recommend that you enable encryption functionality,  
otherwise your computer will be open to illegal access by an outsider  
using a wireless connection. If this occurs, the outsider may illegally  
access your system, eavesdrop, or cause the loss or destruction of  
stored data.  
■ TOSHIBA is not liable for the loss of data due to eavesdropping or  
illegal access through the wireless LAN and the damage thereof.  
Bluetooth wireless technology  
Bluetooth® wireless technology eliminates the need for cables between  
electronic devices such as desktop computers, printers and mobile phones.  
You cannot use the computer's built-in Bluetooth functions and an optional  
Bluetooth devices simultaneously. For reference, Bluetooth wireless  
technology has the following features:  
Worldwide operation  
The Bluetooth radio transmitter and receiver operate in the 2.4GHz band,  
which is license-free and compatible with radio systems in most countries  
in the world.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-30  
 
Operating Basics  
Radio links  
You can easily establish links between two or more devices, with these  
links being maintained even if the devices are not within a line-of-sight of  
each other.  
Security  
Two advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security:  
■ Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible  
to falsify the origin of a message.  
■ Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy.  
Bluetooth® Stack for Windows® by TOSHIBA  
Please note that this software is specifically designed for the following  
operating systems:  
■ Microsoft® Windows VistaTM  
Information regarding the use of this software with these operating systems  
is listed below, with further details being contained with the electronic help  
files supplied with the software.  
This Bluetooth® Stack is based on the Bluetooth® Version 1.1/1.2/2.0+EDR  
specification. However, TOSHIBA cannot confirm the compatibility  
between any computing products and/or other electronic devices that use  
Bluetooth®, other than TOSHIBA notebook computers.  
Release Notes related to the Bluetooth® Stack for Windows®  
by TOSHIBA  
1. Fax application software:  
Please be aware that there is some fax application software that you  
cannot use on this Bluetooth® Stack.  
2. Multi-user considerations:  
On Windows VistaTM, the use of Bluetooth is not supported in a multi-  
user environment. This means that, when you use Bluetooth, other  
users that are logged into the same computer will not be able to use this  
type of functionality.  
Product Support:  
The latest information regarding operating system support, language  
support or available upgrades can be found on our web site  
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe or  
www.pcsupport.toshiba.com in the United States.  
Wireless communication switch  
You can enable or disable Wireless communication (Wireless LAN,  
Wireless WAN and Bluetooth) functions, with the on/off switch. No  
transmissions are sent or received when the switch is off. Slide the switch  
to the right to turn it on and to the left to turn it off.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-31  
 
Operating Basics  
Wireless communication Indicator  
The wireless communication indicator shows the status of the computer's  
wireless communication functions.  
Indicator status  
Indication  
Indicator off  
The wireless communication switch is off - no  
wireless functionality is available.  
Indicator glows  
Wireless communication switch is on. Wireless  
LAN or Bluetooth is turned on by an application.  
If you used the Task Bar to disable the wireless LAN, restart the computer  
or perform the following procedure to re-enable it: Start, Control Panel,  
System and Maintenance, System, Device Manager, Network  
adapters, the wireless device and enable.  
LAN  
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per  
second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,  
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,  
1000BASE-T).  
This section describes how to connect/disconnect to a LAN.  
Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on LAN is  
enabled.  
■ The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system  
is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.  
■ The Link speed (10/100/1000 megabits per second) changes  
automatically depending on the network conditions (connected device,  
cable or noise and so on).  
LAN cable types  
The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN.  
Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings could cause a  
malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator  
regarding set-up procedures.  
If you are using Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,  
1000BASE-T), be sure to connect with a CAT5E cable or higher. You  
cannot use a CAT3 or CAT5 cable.  
If you are using Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-  
TX), be sure to connect with a CAT5 cable or higher. You cannot use a  
CAT3 cable.  
If you are using Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), you  
can connect with a CAT3 or higher cable.  
User’s Manual  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Operating Basics  
Connecting the LAN cable  
To connect the LAN cable, follow the steps as detailed below:  
■ Connect the AC adaptor before connecting the LAN cable. The AC  
adaptor must remain connected during LAN use. If you disconnect the  
AC Adaptor while the computer is accessing a LAN, the system may  
hang up.  
■ Do not connect any other cable to the LAN jack except the LAN cable.  
Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may occur.  
■ Do not connect any power supplying device to the LAN cable that is  
connected to the LAN jack. Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may  
occur.  
1. Turn off the power to the computer and to all external devices  
connected to the computer.  
2. Plug one end of the cable into the LAN jack. Press gently until you hear  
the latch click into place.  
LAN jack  
LAN cable  
Figure 4-10 Connecting the LAN cable  
3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN hub connector or router.  
Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor  
before using or configuring a network connection.  
When the computer is exchanging data with the LAN, the LAN Active  
indicator glows orange. When the computer is connected to a LAN hub but  
is not exchanging data, the Link indicator glows green.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-33  
 
Operating Basics  
Disconnecting the LAN cable  
To disconnect the LAN cable, follow the steps as detailed below:  
Make sure the LAN Active indicator (orange LED) is out before you  
disconnect the computer from the LAN.  
1. Pinch the lever on the connector in the computer’s LAN jack and pull  
out the connector.  
2. Disconnect the cable from the LAN hub or router in the same manner.  
Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor  
before disconnecting from the hub.  
Computer Handling  
This section explains computer handling and maintenance.  
Cleaning the computer  
To help ensure long, trouble-free operation, keep the computer free of dust  
and dirt, and use care with all liquids around it.  
■ Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer. If the computer does get  
wet, turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry completely  
- in these circumstance you should get the computer inspected by an  
authorized service provider in order to assess the scope of any  
damage.  
■ Clean the plastics of the computer using a slightly water dampened  
cloth.  
■ You can clean the display screen by spraying a small amount of glass  
cleaner onto a soft, clean cloth and then wiping the screen gently with  
the cloth.  
Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid run into any  
part of it. Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the  
computer.  
Moving the computer  
While the computer is designed for rugged durability you should exercise a  
few simple precautions when moving it in order to help ensure trouble-free  
operation.  
■ Before moving the computer, it is recommended that you change the  
setting associated with the Hard Disk Drive Protection feature. Please  
refer to the section, Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection, in this  
chapter for further information.  
■ Make sure all disk/disc activity has ended before moving the computer -  
check that the HDD and other indicators on the front of the computer  
are off.  
■ Turn off (shut down) the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-34  
       
Operating Basics  
■ Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the  
computer.  
■ Close the display panel.  
■ Do not pick up the computer by its display panel.  
■ Before carrying your computer, shut it down, disconnect the AC adaptor  
and allow it to cool down - a failure to follow this instruction may result in  
minor heat injury.  
■ Be careful not to subject the computer to impact or shock - a failure to  
follow this instruction could result in damage to computer, computer  
failure or loss of data.  
■ Never transport your computer with any cards installed - this may cause  
damage to either the computer and/or the card resulting in product  
failure.  
■ Always use a suitable carry case when transporting the computer.  
■ When carrying your computer, be sure to hold it securely so that it does  
not fall or hit anything.  
■ Do not carry your computer by holding any of its protruding elements.  
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection  
This computer has a function for reducing the risk of damage on the hard  
disk drive.  
Using an acceleration sensor built into the computer, TOSHIBA HDD  
Protection detects vibration shocks and similar signs of movement of the  
computer, and automatically moves the Hard Disk Drive head to a safe  
position to reduce the risk of damage that could be caused by head-to-disk  
contact.  
This function does not guarantee that the hard disk drive will not be  
damaged.  
When vibration is detected, a message will be displayed on the screen, and  
the icon in the taskbar notification area will change to the protection state.  
This message is displayed until the OK button is pressed or 30 seconds  
pass. When vibration subsides, the icon returns to the normal state.  
Taskbar Icon  
State  
Icon Description  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection is enabled.  
Normal  
Protection  
OFF  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection is active. The  
hard disk drive head is in a safe position.  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection is disabled.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-35  
     
Operating Basics  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties  
You can change the TOSHIBA HDD Protection settings by using the  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties window. To open the window, click  
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> HDD Protection  
Setting. The window can also be started from the icon on the Taskbar or  
from the Control Panel.  
HDD Protection  
You can choose whether to enable or disable TOSHIBA HDD Protection.  
Detection Level  
This function can be set to four levels. The sensitivity levels in which  
vibrations, impacts and their similar signs are detected can be set to OFF,  
1, 2 and 3 in ascending order. Level 3 is recommended for better protection  
of the computer. However, when the computer is used in a mobile  
environment or in other unstable conditions, setting the detection level to 3  
could result in frequent execution of TOSHIBA HDD Protection, which will  
slow Hard Disk Drive reading and writing. Set a lower detection level when  
the speed of Hard Disk Drive reading and writing is a priority.  
Different detection levels can be set depending on whether the computer is  
used as handheld or mobile usages, or whether it is used in a stable  
environment such as on a table in the workplace or at home. By setting  
different detection levels for the computer depending on whether it runs  
with the AC power (desktop) or with batteries (handheld or mobile usage),  
the detection level automatically switches according to the power  
connection mode.  
3D Viewer  
This feature displays a 3D object on the screen which moves in according  
to tilting or vibration of the computer.  
When the TOSHIBA HDD Protection detects computer vibration the Hard  
Disk Drive head is parked and the 3D object disk rotation will stop. When  
the head is un-parked the disk will begin to rotate again.  
The 3D Viewer can be started from the icon in the task tray.  
■ This 3D object virtually represents the Computer's internal Hard Disk  
Drive. This representation may vary from the actual number of disks,  
disk rotation, head movement, part size, shape and direction.  
■ This feature may use a large amount of CPU and memory on some  
models. The computer may become slow or sluggish when attempting  
to run other applications while the 3D Viewer is displayed.  
■ Intensely shaking the computer or other subjecting it to strong impacts  
may cause damage to the computer.  
Details  
To open the Details window, click the Setup Detail button in the TOSHIBA  
HDD Protection Properties window.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-36  
Operating Basics  
Detection Level Amplification  
When the AC adaptor is disconnected or the lid is closed, HDD Detection  
assumes that the computer will be carried and sets the detection level to  
the maximum for 10 seconds.  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Message  
Specify whether to display a message when TOSHIBA HDD Protection is  
active.  
■ This function does not work when the computer is starting, in Sleep  
Mode, in Hibernation Mode, in transition to Hibernation Mode,  
recovering from Hibernation Mode, or powered off. Be sure to not  
subject the computer to vibration or impact while the function is  
disabled.  
■ This function only operates with Windows VistaTM  
.
Heat dispersal  
To protect against overheating, the processor is equipped an internal  
temperature sensor which activates a cooling fan or lowers the processing  
speed if the computer's internal temperature rises to a certain level. You are  
able to select whether to control this temperature by either turning on the  
fan first, then if necessary lowering the processor speed, or by lowering the  
processor speed first, then if necessary turning on the fan - these functions  
are controlled within the Power Options.  
When the processor's temperature falls to a normal range, the fan will be  
turned off and the processor operation returned to its standard speed.  
If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with  
either setting, the computer will automatically shuts down to prevent any  
damage - in this instance all unsaved data in memory will be lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-37  
   
Chapter 5  
The Keyboard  
The computer's keyboard layouts are compatible with a 104/105-key  
enhanced keyboard - by pressing some keys in combination, all of the  
104/105-key enhanced keyboard functions can be performed on the  
computer.  
The number of keys available on your keyboard will depend on which  
country/region your computer is configured for, with keyboards being  
available for numerous languages.  
In use there are six different types of keys, specifically typewriter keys,  
function keys, soft keys, Hot keys, Windows special keys and the keypad  
overlay.  
Typewriter keys  
The typewriter keys produce the upper-case and lower-case letters,  
numbers, punctuation marks, and special symbols that appear on the  
screen. However, there are some differences between using a typewriter  
and using a computer keyboard:  
■ Letters and numbers produced in computer text vary in width. Spaces,  
which are created by a 'space character' may also vary depending on  
line justification and other factors.  
■ The lowercase l (el) and the number 1 (one), together with the  
uppercase O (oh) and the 0 (zero), are not interchangeable on  
computers as they are on a typewriter.  
■ The CAPS LOCK function key locks only the alphabetic characters into  
upper-case while the Shift Lock function on a typewriter places all keys  
in the shifted position.  
■ The SHIFT keys, the Tab key, and the BACK SPACE key perform the  
same function as their typewriter counterparts but also have special  
computer functions.  
Never remove the key caps on your keyboard. Doing so could cause  
damage to the parts under the key caps.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1  
           
The Keyboard  
Function keys: F1 … F12  
The function keys (not to be confused with the special FN key) are the  
twelve keys at the top of your keyboard - these keys function differently  
from other keys.  
F1 through F12 are called function keys because they execute  
programmed functions when pressed and, when used in combination with  
the FN key, those keys marked with icons also execute specific functions  
on the computer. Please refer to the section, Soft keys: FN key  
combinations, in this chapter for further information, taking care to note that  
the function executed by individual keys will depend on the software you  
are using.  
Soft keys: FN key combinations  
The FN (function) is unique to TOSHIBA computers and is used in  
combination with other keys to form soft keys. Soft keys are key  
combinations that enable, disable or configure specific features.  
Please note that some software may disable or interfere with soft-key  
operations, and that the soft-key settings are not restored when the  
computer returns from Sleep Mode.  
Emulating keys on an enhanced keyboard  
Figure 5-1 A 104-key enhanced keyboard layout  
This computer’s keyboard is designed to provide all the features of the 104-  
key enhanced keyboard. Since the keyboard is smaller and has fewer keys,  
some of the enhanced keyboard functions must be simulated using two  
keys instead of one in the larger keyboard.  
The FN key can be combined with the following keys to simulate functions  
similar to those of keys on the 104/105 key enhanced keyboard which are  
not on this computer’s keyboard.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2  
           
The Keyboard  
Press FN + F10 or FN + F11 to access the computer's integrated keypad.  
When activated, the keys with grey markings on their bottom edge become  
either numeric keypad keys (FN + F11) or cursor control keys (FN + F10).  
Please refer to the Keypad overlay section in this chapter for more  
information on how to operate these keys, taking care to note that the  
power on default for both settings is off.  
Press FN + F12 (ScrLock) to lock the cursor on a specific line. The power  
on default is off.  
Press FN + ENTER to simulate ENTER on the enhanced keyboard’s  
numeric keypad.  
Hot keys  
Hot keys (pressing FN + a function or ESC key) let you enable or disable  
certain features of the computer.  
Mute: Pressing FN + ESC turns the volume on and off.  
Lock: Pressing FN + F1 enters ''Lock computer mode''. To restore your  
desktop, you need to log on again.  
Power Plan: Pressing FN + F2 changes the power settings.  
User’s Manual  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
The Keyboard  
Sleep: Pressing FN + F3 switches the system to Sleep Mode.  
Hibernate: Pressing FN + F4 switches the system to Hibernation Mode.  
Output: Pressing FN + F5 changes the active display device.  
Brightness Down: Pressing FN + F6 decreases the computer's display  
panel brightness in individual steps.  
Brightness Up: Pressing FN + F7 increases the computer's display panel  
brightness in individual steps.  
Wireless: Pressing FN + F8 switches the active wireless devices if the  
wireless communication switch is switched on.  
If no wireless communication device is installed, no dialog box will appear.  
Touch Pad: Pressing FN + F9 enables or disables the Touch Pad and  
AccuPoint function.  
Zoom: Pressing FN + Space changes the display resolution.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-4  
                                   
The Keyboard  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (reduce): Pressing FN + 1 reduces the icon  
size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application  
windows.  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (enlarge): Pressing FN + 2 enlarges the icon  
size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application  
windows.  
FN Sticky key  
You can use the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility to make the FN key sticky,  
that is, you can press it once, release it, and then press an "F number" key.  
To start the TOSHIBA Accessibility utility, click Start -> All Programs ->  
TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> Accessibility.  
Windows special keys  
The keyboard provides two keys that have special functions in Windows,  
the Windows Start Button key activates the Start menu while the  
application key has the same function as the secondary (right) mouse  
button.  
This key activates the Windows Start menu.  
This key has the same function as the secondary (right) mouse button.  
Keypad overlay  
Your computer's keyboard does not have a separate numeric keypad but  
includes a numeric keypad overlay which functions like one - this is located  
in the center of the keyboard with the relevant keys having grey letters at  
their front edge. The overlay provides the same functions as the numeric  
keypad on a standard 101/102-key enhanced keyboard.  
Turning on the overlays  
The numeric keypad overlay can be used for numeric data input or cursor  
and page control.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-5  
                   
The Keyboard  
Arrow mode  
To turn on Arrow Mode, press FN + F10 - the Arrow mode indicator lights  
and you are able to access cursor and page control functions by using the  
keys. You are able to press FN + F10 again to turn off this overlay function.  
Numeric mode  
To turn on Numeric Mode, press FN + F11 - the Numeric Mode indicator  
lights and you are able to access numeric characters by using the keys.  
You are able to press FN + F11 again to turn off this overlay function.  
Figure 5-2 The numeric keypad overlay  
Temporarily using normal keyboard (overlay on)  
While using the overlay, you can temporarily access the normal keyboard  
functions without having to turn the overlay off:  
1. Hold down FN key and press any other key - this key will operate as if  
the overlay were off.  
2. Type upper-case characters by holding down FN + SHIFT and pressing  
a character key.  
3. Release FN key to continue using the selected overlay function.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-6  
     
The Keyboard  
Temporarily using overlay (overlay off)  
While using the normal keyboard function, you can temporarily use the  
keypad overlay without having to turn it on:  
1. Hold down FN key.  
2. Check the keyboard indicators as pressing the FN key will turn on the  
most recently used overlay function - if the Numeric Mode indicator  
lights you can use the overlay for numeric entry, while if the Arrow Mode  
indicator lights, you can use the overlay for cursor and page control  
function.  
3. Release FN key to return to normal keyboard operation.  
Temporarily changing modes  
If the computer is in Numeric Mode, you can switch temporarily to Arrow  
Mode by pressing a SHIFT key, while if it is in Arrow Mode, you can switch  
temporarily to Numeric Mode by also pressing a SHIFT key.  
Generating ASCII characters  
Not all ASCII characters can be generated using normal keyboard  
operation, but you are able to generate these characters using their specific  
ASCII codes.  
With the overlay on:  
1. Hold down ALT key.  
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code of the character you  
require.  
3. Release ALT - the ASCII character will appear on the display screen.  
With the overlay off:  
1. Hold down ALT + FN.  
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code of the character you  
require.  
3. Release ALT + FN - the ASCII character will appear on the display  
screen.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-7  
     
Chapter 6  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
The computer's power resources include the AC adaptor, battery pack and  
any internal batteries. This chapter provides details on making the most  
effective use of these resources, and includes information on charging and  
changing batteries, tips for saving battery power, and information on the  
different power-up modes.  
Power conditions  
The computer's operating capability and battery charge status are affected  
by different power conditions, including whether an AC adaptor is  
connected, whether a battery pack is installed and what the charge level is  
for that battery.  
Table 6-1 Power conditions  
Power on  
Power off  
(no operation)  
AC  
adaptor  
connected  
Battery fully  
charged  
• Operates  
• No charge  
• No charge  
• LED: Battery green  
DC IN green  
• LED: Battery green  
DC IN green  
Battery partially • Operates  
• Quick charge  
charged or no  
charge  
• Charge  
• LED: Battery orange  
DC IN green  
• LED: Battery orange  
DC IN green  
• Operates  
No battery  
installed  
• No charge  
• No charge  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN green  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN green  
User’s Manual  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Table 6-1 Power conditions continued  
Power on  
Power off  
(no operation)  
AC  
adaptor  
not  
Battery charge  
is above low  
battery trigger  
• Operates  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN off  
connected point  
Battery charge  
• Operates  
is below low  
battery trigger  
point  
• LED: Battery  
flashes orange  
DC IN off  
Battery charge  
is exhausted  
Computer shuts down  
No battery  
installed  
• No operation  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN off  
Monitoring of power condition  
As shown in the below table, the Battery, DC IN and Power indicators on  
the system indicator alert you to the computer’s operating capability and  
battery charge status.  
Battery indicator  
Check the Battery indicator to determine the status of the battery pack.  
The following indicator lights indicate the battery status:  
Flashing orange  
The battery charge is low, the AC adaptor must be  
connected in order to recharge the battery.  
Orange  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the  
battery is charging.  
Green  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the  
battery is fully charged.  
No light  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not  
light.  
If the battery pack becomes too hot while it is being charged, the charge  
will stop and the Battery indicator will go out. When the battery pack's  
temperature falls to a normal range, charging will resume - this process will  
occur regardless of whether the computer's power is on or off.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2  
     
Power and Power-Up Modes  
DC IN indicator  
Check the DC IN indicator to determine the power status with the AC  
adaptor connected - the following indicator conditions should be noted:  
Green  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and is  
correctly supplying power to the computer.  
Flashing orange  
Indicates a problem with the power supply. You  
should initially try plugging the AC adaptor into  
another power outlet - if it still does not operate  
properly, you should contact your reseller or dealer.  
No light  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not  
light.  
Power indicator  
Check the Power indicator to determine the power status of the computer -  
the following indicator conditions should be noted:  
Green  
Indicates power is being supplied to the computer  
and the computer is turned on.  
Blinking orange  
Indicates that the computer is in Sleep Mode and  
that there is sufficient power available (AC adaptor  
or battery) to maintain this condition. In Sleep Mode,  
this indicator will turn on for one second and off for  
two seconds.  
No light  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not  
light.  
Battery  
This section explains battery types, handling and use.  
Battery types  
The computer has four different types of batteries.  
Battery pack  
When the AC adaptor is not connected, the computer's main power source  
is a removable lithium ion battery pack, also referred to in this manual as  
the main battery. You can purchase additional battery packs for extended  
use of the computer away from an AC power source although you should  
not change the battery pack while the AC adaptor is connected.  
Before you remove the battery pack, save your data and shut down the  
computer, or place the computer into Hibernation Mode. Please be aware  
that, when placing the computer into Hibernation Mode, the contents of  
memory will be saved to the hard disk drive, although for safety sake, it is  
best to also save your data manually.  
User’s Manual  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Extended Capacity Battery Pack (option)  
The Extended Capacity Battery Pack can be purchased separately as an  
optional accessory.  
High Capacity Battery Pack (option)  
The High Capacity Battery Pack can be purchased separately as an  
optional accessory.  
Real Time Clock (RTC) battery  
The Real Time Clock (RTC) battery provides power for the internal real  
time clock and calendar function and also maintains the system  
configuration while the computer is turned off. If the RTC battery becomes  
completely discharged, the system will lose this information and the real  
time clock and calendar will stop working - in this instance the following  
message will be displayed when you turn on the power:  
S
**** RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is  
inconsistent ****  
Press [F1] key to set Date/Time.  
You can change the Real Time Clock settings by turning the computer on  
while pressing the ESC key and then the F1 key when prompted. Please  
refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for further information.  
The RTC battery does not charge while the computer is turned off even if  
the AC adaptor is attached.  
Care and use of the battery pack  
This section provides the important safety precautions in order to handle  
your battery pack properly.  
Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for  
detailed precautions and handling instructions.  
■ Make sure the battery is securely installed in the computer before  
attempting to charge the battery pack. Improper installation could  
generate smoke or fire, or cause the battery pack to rupture.  
■ Keep the battery pack out of reach of infants and children. It can cause  
injury.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-4  
 
Power and Power-Up Modes  
■ The battery pack, Extended Battery Pack and High Capacity Battery  
Pack are lithium ion batteries, which can explode if not replaced, used,  
handled or disposed of properly. Dispose of the battery as required by  
local ordinances or regulations. Use only batteries recommended by  
TOSHIBA as replacements.  
■ The computer's RTC battery is a Ni-MH battery and should be replaced  
only by your dealer or by a TOSHIBA service representative. The  
battery can explode if not properly replaced, used, handled or  
disposed. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or  
regulations.  
■ Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature between 5 and  
35 degrees Celsius. Otherwise, the electrolyte solution might leak,  
battery pack performance might deteriorate and the battery life might  
be shortened.  
■ Never install or remove the battery pack without first turning off the  
power and disconnecting the AC adaptor. Never remove the battery  
pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode. Data could be lost.  
■ Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on LAN function is  
enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery pack, disable  
the Wake-up on LAN function.  
■ Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on Wireless LAN  
function is enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery  
pack, disable the Wake-up on Wireless LAN function.  
Charging the batteries  
When the power in the battery pack becomes low, the Battery indicator will  
flash orange to indicate that only a few minutes of battery power remain. If  
you continue to use the computer while the Battery indicator flashes, the  
computer will enable Hibernation Mode so that you do not lose any data,  
and automatically turn itself off.  
You must recharge a battery pack when it becomes discharged.  
Procedures  
To recharge a battery pack while it is installed in the computer, connect the  
AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack and plug the other end into a working  
outlet - the Battery indicator will glow orange while the battery is being  
charged.  
Use only the computer connected to an AC power source or optional  
TOSHIBA Battery charger to charge the battery pack. Never attempt to  
charge the battery pack with any other charger.  
Time  
Refer to User Information Guide about Charging time.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-5  
 
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Battery charging notice  
The battery may not begin charging immediately under the following  
conditions:  
■ The battery is extremely hot or cold (if the battery is extremely hot, it  
might not charge at all). To ensure the battery charges to its full  
capacity, you should charge it at room temperature of between 5° to  
35°C (41° to 95°F).  
■ The battery is nearly completely discharged. In this instance you should  
leave the AC adaptor connected for a few minutes and the battery  
should begin charging.  
The Battery indicator may show a rapid decrease in battery operating time  
when you try to charge a battery under the following conditions:  
■ The battery has not been used for a long time.  
■ The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer for  
a long time.  
■ A cool battery is installed in a warm computer.  
In such cases you should follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power  
on until the system automatically turns itself off.  
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack of the computer, and to  
a wall outlet that is supplying power.  
3. Charge the battery until the Battery indicator glows green.  
Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal  
capacity.  
Monitoring battery capacity  
Remaining battery power can be monitored using the following methods.  
■ Clicking the battery icon on the task bar  
■ Via the Battery Status in the Windows Mobility Center window  
■ You should wait at least 16 seconds after turning on the computer  
before trying to monitor the remaining operating time. This is because  
the computer needs this time to check the battery's remaining capacity  
and then calculate the remaining operating time, based on this together  
with the current power consumption.  
■ Please be aware that the actual remaining operating time may differ  
slightly from the calculated time.  
■ With repeated discharges and recharges, the battery's capacity will  
gradually decrease. In view of this it will be noted that an often used,  
older battery will not operate for as long as a new battery even when  
both are fully charged.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6  
 
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Maximizing battery operating time  
A battery's usefulness depends on how long it can supply power on a  
single charge, while how long the charge lasts in a battery depends on:  
■ Processor speed  
■ Screen brightness  
■ Cooling method  
■ System Sleep Mode  
■ System Hibernation Mode  
■ Display power off period  
■ Hard disk drive power off period  
■ How often and for how long you use the hard disk drive and external  
disk(c) drives, for example, optical disc and floppy diskette drive.  
■ How much charge the battery contained to begin with.  
■ How you use optional devices, such as a PC Cards, to which the  
battery supplies power.  
■ Whether you enable Sleep Mode, which can conserve battery power if  
you are frequently turning the computer off and on.  
■ Where you store your programs and data.  
■ Whether you close the display panel when you are not using the  
keyboard - closing the display saves power.  
■ The environmental temperature - operating time decreases at low  
temperatures.  
■ The condition of the battery terminals - you should always ensure the  
terminals stay clean by wiping them with a clean dry cloth before  
installing the battery pack.  
Retaining data with power off  
Refer to User Information Guide about Retaining time.  
Extending battery life  
To maximize the life of your battery packs:  
■ At least once a month, disconnect the computer from a power source  
and operate it on battery power until the battery pack fully discharges.  
Before doing so, follow the steps as detailed below.  
1. Turn off the computer's power.  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer's power - if it  
does not turn on then go to Step 4.  
3. Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes. If you find  
that the battery pack has at least five minutes of operating time,  
continue operating until the battery pack is fully discharged,  
however, if the Battery indicator flashes or there is some other  
warning to indicate a low battery condition, go to Step 4.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-7  
   
Power and Power-Up Modes  
4. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack of the computer, and  
to a wall outlet that is supplying power. The DC IN indicator should  
glow green, and the Battery indicator should glow orange to  
indicate that the battery pack is being charged, however, in the  
event that DC IN indicator does not glow this indicates that power is  
not being supplied - check the connections for the AC adaptor and  
the power cord.  
5. Charge the battery pack until the Battery indicator glows green.  
■ If you have extra battery packs, rotate their use.  
■ If you will not be using the system for an extended period, for example  
for more than one month, remove the battery pack from the computer.  
■ Store spare battery packs in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight.  
Replacing the battery pack  
Please be aware that the battery pack is classified as a consumable item.  
The operating life of the battery pack will gradually reduce through  
repeated charging and discharging, and will need to be replaced when it  
reaches the end of its operating life. In addition to this, you might also  
replace a discharged battery pack with a charged spare when you are  
operating your computer away from an AC power source for an extended  
period of time.  
This section explains how to remove and install the battery pack, and  
begins with the removal process which is detailed through the following  
steps.  
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode.  
Data is stored in RAM, so if the computer loses power it could be lost.  
■ In Hibernation Mode, data will be lost if you remove the battery pack or  
disconnect the AC adaptor before the save is completed. Wait for the  
Hard Disk Drive indicator to go out.  
■ Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the  
battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the  
battery release latch and cause injuries.  
Removing the battery pack  
To remove a discharged battery, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Save your work.  
2. Turn the computer's power off - ensure that the Power indicator is off.  
3. Remove all cables and peripherals that are connected to the computer.  
4. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.  
5. Slide the battery lock (1) into its (  
pack.  
) position to disengage the battery  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-8  
   
Power and Power-Up Modes  
6. Slide and hold the battery release latch (2) and then remove the battery  
pack from the computer (3).  
Battery  
release latch  
Battery pack  
Battery lock  
Figure 6-1 Releasing the battery pack  
Installing the battery pack  
To install a battery pack, follow the steps as detailed below:  
Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the  
battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the battery  
release latch and cause injuries.  
1. Insert the battery pack as far as it will go into the computer (1).  
2. Ensure that the battery pack is securely in place and the battery lock (2)  
is in its (  
) position.  
Battery pack  
Battery lock  
Figure 6-2 Securing the battery pack  
3. Turn your computer over.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-9  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
TOSHIBA Password Utility  
The TOSHIBA Password Utility provides two levels of password security:  
User and Supervisor.  
Passwords set by the TOSHIBA Password Utility function are different  
from the Windows password.  
User Password  
To start the utility, point to or click the following items:  
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities ->Password Utility  
The User Password dialog box contains two main fields: User Password  
and User Token.  
User authentication may be required to validate user rights when using  
"TOSHIBA Password Utility" to delete or change passwords, or create  
tokens, etc.  
User Password field  
■ Set (button)  
Click this button to register a password of up to 50 characters. After a  
password is set, you will be prompted to enter it when you start the  
computer. Check "Set the same string simultaneously as the HDD User  
Password" when setting the HDD User Password.  
■ After you set the password, a dialog box will be displayed asking  
whether you want to save it to a floppy diskette or other media. If you  
forget the password, you can open the password file on another  
computer. Be sure to keep the media in a safe place.  
■ When entering the character string to register the password, enter from  
the keyboard character by character and do not enter as ASCII code or  
copy-and-paste the character string. In addition, ensure that the  
registered password is correct by outputting the character string to the  
password file.  
■ When entering a password, do not enter any characters (for example  
"!" or "#") produced by pressing the SHIFT or ALT keys and so on.  
■ Delete (button)  
Click this button to delete a registered password. Before you can delete  
a password, you must first enter the current password correctly or insert  
a proper token. Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete the HDD  
Passwords or to set the HDD Master Password.  
■ Change (button)  
Click this button to change a registered password. Before you can  
change a password, you must first enter the current password correctly  
or insert a proper token. Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete  
the HDD Passwords or to set the HDD Master Password.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-10  
     
Power and Power-Up Modes  
■ Owner String (text box)  
You can use this box to associate text with the password. After you  
enter text, click Apply or OK. When the computer is started, this text  
will be displayed together with the prompt asking you to enter a  
password.  
■ If you forget your HDD User Password, TOSHIBA will NOT be able to  
assist you, and your HDD will be rendered COMPLETELY and  
PERMANENTLY INOPERABLE. TOSHIBA will NOT be held  
responsible for any loss of any data, any loss of use or access to your  
HDD, or for any other losses to you or any other person or organization  
that result from the loss of access to your HDD. If you can’t accept this  
risk, don’t register the HDD User Password.  
■ When saving the HDD User Password shut down or restart the  
computer. If the computer is not shut down or restarted, the saved data  
may not be correctly reflected. For more information on shutting down  
or restarting the computer, refer to Turning off the power in Chapter 1.  
Refer to Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program section in Chapter 7  
for more information.  
User Token field  
■ Create (button)  
You can use an SD Card token, instead of entering the password. After  
you have registered a password, insert an SD Card in Bridge media slot  
and click Create. You can use an SD Card of any capacity, but it must  
be formatted correctly.  
If an unformatted card or one with an incompatible format is inserted,  
you will be prompted to format it with a tool named TOSHIBA SD  
Memory Card Format. To start the format tool, point to or click the  
following items:  
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> SD Memory  
Card Format  
When you format an SD Memory card, all data will be deleted. Be sure to  
save data on the card to other media before you format the card.  
■ Disable (button)  
Click this button to invalidate the token. You cannot re-validate old  
tokens, but you can use the same SD Cards to create new tokens.  
After using the token created for authentication, do not leave it inserted in  
the Bridge media slot, ensure that the token is removed from the slot and  
stored in a safe location. If the token is left in the slot, there is a danger of  
theft or a third party using it for authentication and operating the user's  
computer (resulting in extraction, modification or deletion of data) when the  
user is not at their desk.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-11  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Supervisor Password  
If you set a Supervisor Password, some functions might be restricted when  
a user logs on with the User Password. To set a Supervisor Password,  
execute the file TOSPU.EXE. The file is located at:  
C:\Program Files\Toshiba\PasswordUtility\TOSPU.exe  
This utility lets you do the following:  
■ Register, delete or change the Supervisor Password.  
■ Create or invalidate a Supervisor Password token.  
This function in the TOSHIBA Password Utility lets you invalidate only  
supervisor tokens or all tokens, including user and supervisor tokens.  
■ Specify restrictions for general users.  
Starting the computer by password  
If you have already registered a password, there are three ways to start the  
computer:  
■ Insert an SD Card token before you turn on the computer. The  
computer will start normally, without displaying a password prompt.  
■ Swipe your fingerprint on the sensor if you have already registered the  
fingerprint with the Fingerprint utility and enabled Fingerprint System  
Boot Authentication. If you would not like to swipe your finger or cannot  
authenticate the fingerprint for some reasons, push the BACK SPACE  
key to skip the fingerprint authentication screen. You can try to swipe  
the fingerprint up to five times. If you failed fingerprint authentication  
five times, you must enter the password manually to start the computer.  
■ Enter the password manually.  
The password is necessary only if the computer was Shutdown and  
Hibernation in Boot Mode.  
It is not needed in Sleep Mode and Restart.  
To enter a password manually, follow these steps:  
1. Turn on the power as described in Chapter 1, Getting Started. The  
following message will appear in the screen:  
S
2. Enter the Password.  
Password=  
3. Press ENTER.  
If you enter the password incorrectly three times in a row, the computer  
shuts off. In this case, you must turn the computer back on to retry  
password entry.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-12  
   
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Power-up modes  
The computer has three different power-up modes as follows:  
■ Boot Mode : The computer will shut down without saving data - in view  
of this you must always save your work before you turn the computer  
off.  
■ Hibernation Mode : Data in memory will be saved to the hard disk drive.  
■ Sleep Mode : Data will maintained in the computer's memory.  
Please refer to the sections Turning on the power and Turning off the  
power in Chapter 1, Getting Started for further information.  
Windows utilities  
You can configure various settings associated with both Sleep Mode and  
Hibernation Mode within the Power Options (to access it, Start -> Control  
Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).  
Hot keys  
You can use the FN + F3 hot key to enter Sleep Mode or FN + F4 to enter  
Hibernation Mode - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for further  
details.  
Panel power on/off  
You can set up your computer so that power is turned off automatically  
when you close the display panel, and turned on again when you open it.  
Please note that this function is only available for Sleep Mode or  
Hibernation Mode, not for Boot Mode.  
If the panel power off function is enabled, and you manually shut down  
Windows, do not close the display panel until the shut down process has  
been completed.  
System Auto Off  
This feature turns the system off automatically if it is not used for a set  
period of time, and can be configured for both Sleep Mode or Hibernation  
Mode.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-13  
         
Chapter 7  
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
This chapter explains how to use the TOSHIBA HW Setup program to  
configure your computer, and provides information on settings for various  
functions.  
Accessing HW Setup  
To run the HW Setup program, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA ->  
Utilities -> HWSetup.  
HW Setup window  
The HW Setup window contains a number of tabs (General, Display, Boot  
Priority, Keyboard, CPU, LAN, Device Config and USB) to allow specific  
functions of the computer to be configured.  
In addition there are also three buttons: OK, Cancel and Apply.  
OK  
Accepts your changes and closes the HW Setup  
window.  
Cancel  
Apply  
Closes the window without accepting your  
changes.  
Accepts all your changes without closing the HW  
Setup window.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1  
             
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
General  
This window displays the BIOS version and contains two buttons : Default  
and About.  
Default  
Return all HW Setup values to the factory  
settings.  
About  
Display the HW Setup version.  
Setup  
This field displays the installed BIOS versionand date.  
Display  
This tab lets you customize your computer’s display settings for either the  
internal display or an external monitor.  
Power On Display  
This tab allows you to select the display to be used when the computer is  
started. Please note that this setting is only available on standard VGA  
mode and is not available as part of the Windows Desktop properties.  
The Power On Display is supported with some models.  
Auto-Selected  
Selects an external monitor if one is connected,  
otherwise, it selects the internal display (default).  
LCD + Analog RGB Selects both the internal display and an external  
monitor for simultaneous display.  
If the connected external monitor does not support the computer's current  
video mode, selecting the LCD + Analog RGB mode will not display any  
image on the external monitor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2  
   
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
Boot Priority  
Boot Priority Options  
This tab allows you to select the priority for booting the computer - the  
following settings are available:  
FDD −> HDD −> CD-  
ROM −> LAN  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. floppy diskette drive*1, 2.  
hard disk drive, 3. CD-ROM*2, 4. LAN.  
HDD −> FDD −> CD-  
ROM −> LAN  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. hard disk drive, 2. floppy  
diskette drive*1, 3. CD-ROM*2, 4. LAN.  
FDD −> CD-ROM −>  
LAN −> HDD  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. floppy diskette drive*1, 2.  
CD-ROM*2, 3. LAN, 4. hard disk drive.  
HDD −> CD-ROM −>  
LAN −> FDD  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. hard disk drive, 2. CD-  
ROM*2, 3. LAN, 4. floppy diskette drive*1.  
CD-ROM −> LAN −>  
FDD −> HDD  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. CD-ROM*2, 2. LAN, 3.  
floppy diskette drive*1, 4. hard disk drive.  
CD-ROM −> LAN −>  
HDD −> FDD  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. CD-ROM*2, 2. LAN, 3.  
hard disk drive, 4. floppy diskette drive*1.  
You can override the settings and manually select a boot device by  
pressing one of the following keys while the computer is booting:  
U
N
1
Selects the USB floppy diskette drive.  
Selects the network.  
Selects the built-in hard disk drive.  
2
C
M
Selects the CD-ROM* .  
Selects the USB memory drive.  
1
* The floppy diskette drive will be used to start the computer when there is  
a bootable disk contained in the external drive. If SD memory is installed as  
well, the external floppy diskette drive will be checked first, followed by the  
SD memory device itself.  
2
* The optical disc drive will be used to start the computer when there is a  
bootable disk contained in the drive.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3  
     
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
To change the boot drive, follow the steps below.  
1. Hold down F12 and boot the computer.  
2. The following menu will be displayed with the following icons: Built-in  
hard disk drive, CD-ROM, FDD (or SD memory card), Network (LAN),  
USB Memory boot.  
Please note that a highlighted bar will only appear under the selected  
device.  
3. Use the left/right cursor keys to highlight the boot device you want and  
press ENTER.  
If a Supervisor Password has been set, manual boot device selection  
functions may be restricted.  
The boot device selection methods described above will not change the  
boot priority settings that have been configured in HW Setup. In addition, if  
you press a key other than one of those listed, or if the selected device is  
not installed, the system will continue to boot according to the current and  
available settings in HW Setup.  
HDD Priority Options  
If more than one hard disk drive is installed in the computer, this option  
allows you to set the priority associated with hard disk drive detection - the  
first hard disk drive detected that has a valid boot command on it will be the  
device from which the computer will start.  
Built-in HDD ->  
USB (Default)  
The priority is set as built-in HDD -> USB.  
USB -> Built-in  
HDD  
The priority is set as USB -> built-in HDD.  
■ If a boot command is not found on the first detected hard disk drive, the  
system will not boot from the optical disk drive in the list, instead it will  
search for the next device in the Boot Priority list and startup from this  
as appropriate.  
■ Please be aware that it may not be displayed in some models.  
USB Memory BIOS Support Type  
This option allows you to set the type of the USB memory to be used as a  
startup device.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-4  
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
HDD  
FDD  
Sets the USB memory to be the equivalent of a  
hard disk drive (default). With this setting, the  
USB memory device can be used to start the  
computer as though it were a hard disk drive  
based on the hard disk drive settings within both  
the Boot Priority and HDD Priority options  
detailed previously.  
Sets the USB memory to be the equivalent of a  
floppy diskette drive. With this setting, the USB  
memory device can be used to start the  
computer as though it were a floppy diskette  
based on the floppy diskette drive settings within  
the Boot Priority option detailed previously.  
Keyboard  
Wake-up on Keyboard  
When this feature is enabled, and the computer is in Sleep Mode, you can  
turn on the system by pressing any key. However, please be aware that this  
option will only work with the internal keyboard and only when the computer  
is in Sleep Mode.  
Enabled  
Enables the Wake-up on Keyboard function.  
Disabled  
Disables the Wake-up on Keyboard function (Default).  
CPU  
This function allows you to set the processor's operating mode.  
Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode  
This option allows you to configure the power saving modes associated  
with the processor - the following settings are available:  
Please note that this option is displayed only on models with an Intel®  
CoreTM 2 Duo processor.  
Dynamically  
Switchable  
The processor's power consumption and  
automatic clock speed switching functions are  
enabled - in use the processor's operation is  
automatically switched when necessary (default).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-5  
   
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
Always High  
Always Low  
The processor's power consumption and  
automatic clock speed switching functions are  
disabled - in use the processor will always run at  
its highest level of power consumption and its  
highest speed.  
The processor's power consumption and  
automatic clock speed switching functions are  
disabled - in use the processor will always run at  
a lower level of power consumption and a low  
speed.  
LAN  
Wake-up on LAN  
This feature lets the computer’s power be turned on when it receives a  
wake-up signal from the LAN.  
Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on LAN is  
enabled.  
The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system is  
off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.  
Power will be automatically turned on when a signal is received from an  
administrator's computer which is connected via a network.  
The following settings can be changed when the Built-in LAN is Enabled.  
Connect the AC adaptor when using the Wake-up on LAN function. The  
battery retention time will be shorter than the times listed in this manual  
when this function is enabled. Refer to the section in chapter 6, Retaining  
data with power off.  
Enabled  
Enables Wake-up on LAN.  
Disabled  
Disables Wake-up on LAN (Default).  
Built-in LAN  
This feature enables or disables the Built-in LAN.  
Enabled  
Enables Built-in LAN functions (Default).  
Disables Built-in LAN functions.  
Disabled  
Device Config  
Device Configuration  
This option allows you to set how the computer's hardware devices will be  
configured.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-6  
   
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
All Devices  
Setup by OS  
The computer's BIOS will setup and configure all  
devices.  
The operating system will setup and configure all  
of the devices that it can control (default).  
USB  
USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
You can use this option to enable or disable USB keyboard/mouse legacy  
emulation so that, even if your operating system does not support USB  
devices, you can still use a standard USB mouse and keyboard - to achieve  
this you should set the appropriate option(s) to Enabled.  
Enabled  
Enables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
function (Default).  
Disabled  
Disables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
function.  
USB-FDD Legacy Emulation  
Use this option to enable or disable USB floppy diskette drive legacy  
emulation. If your operating system does not support USB, you can still use  
a USB floppy diskette drive by setting the USB-FDD Legacy Emulation  
item to Enabled.  
Enabled  
Enables the USB floppy diskette drive legacy  
emulation function (Default).  
Disabled  
Disables the USB floppy diskette drive legacy  
emulation function.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-7  
 
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
BIOS Setup Program  
Settings for some features are carried out in the BIOS setup program.  
Notes Before Using the BIOS Setup Application  
■ In most cases, changes to the system's configuration should be made  
within Windows by using applications such as TOSHIBA HW Setup,  
TOSHIBA Password Utility, Windows Device Manager and so forth.  
If you make changes to the configuration through the BIOS setup  
program, please be aware that the configuration set through the  
Windows applications will take priority.  
■ Changes to the settings within the BIOS setup program will not be  
erased even if the power supply is turned off and the main battery  
removed. However, if the built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) battery runs  
out of power, most of the settings will revert back to their default values.  
However, please note that the following items will not be affected in this  
instance:  
• Password  
• Hard Disk Drive Password  
• Security Controller  
• Fingerprint patterns  
Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program  
Starting the BIOS Setup Program  
1. Turn on the computer while pressing the ESC key - if the Password =  
prompt is displayed, enter either the Supervisor Password, if one is set,  
or the User Password and press the ENTER key. Please refer to  
Chapter 6, the TOSHIBA Password Utility for further details about the  
User Password.  
2. At the Check system. Then press [F1] key.prompt, press the  
F1 key - the BIOS setup application will start up.  
Please refer to the operating instructions displayed in the settings screen.  
Ending the BIOS Setup Program  
In order to save the changes you have made and end the BIOS setup  
application, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Press the END key - this will cause the Are you sure? (Y/N). The  
changes you made will cause the system to reboot.  
prompt to be displayed at the bottom of the screen.  
2. Press the Y key - this will save the configuration changes and end the  
BIOS setup application, automatically restarting the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-8  
     
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
Ending the BIOS Setup Program Halfway  
The configuration settings can be terminated halfway without saving any of  
the changes made by following the steps detailed below:  
1. Press the ESC key - the Exit without saving? (Y/N)prompt to  
be displayed at the bottom of the screen.  
2. Press the Y key - the BIOS setup application will exit and the computer  
will automatically restart.  
Supervisor Password  
This setting, which is displayed on the first page of the setup screen, allows  
you to register a Supervisor Password of the computer.  
Not Registered  
Registered  
Supervisor Password has not been registered  
(Default).  
Supervisor Password has been registered.  
The User Password and Supervisor Password configured in BIOS SETUP  
can also be changed or deleted using the TOSHIBA Password Utility.  
When unable to perform the following operations, use the TOSHIBA  
Password Utility to change or delete the configured Supervisor Password.  
• Configuration changes in the BIOS Setup Program  
• Configuration changes in the HW Setup utility  
• Selection of the startup device during computer recovery.  
Core Multi - Processing  
The Core Multi-Processing sets the CPU operating mode.  
Enabled is Dual Core mode.  
Disabled is Single Core mode.  
Please note that this option is displayed only on models with an Intel®  
Core™ 2 Duo processor.  
Enabled  
Enables Core Multi - Processing functions  
(Default).  
Disabled  
Disables Core Multi - Processing functions.  
Virtualization Technology  
Virtualization Technology sets enable or disable of the Intel Virtualization  
Technology installed in the CPU.  
Intel Virtualization Technology is the technique that allows one machine to  
operate as multiple virtual machines.  
The Virtualization Technology is supported with some models.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-9  
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
The Disabled command does not allow use of the Intel Virtualization  
Technology.  
The Enabled command allows use of the Intel Virtualization Technology.  
Enabled  
Enables Virtualization Technology.  
Disabled  
Disables Virtualization Technology (Default).  
Enhanced C-States  
This feature enables or disables the Enhanced C-States.  
Please note that this option is displayed only on models with an Intel®  
Core™ 2 Duo processor.  
Enabled  
This lowers the power consumption (Default).  
This does not lower the power consumption.  
Disabled  
Execute-Disable Bit Capability  
This setting, which is displayed on the first page of the setup screen,  
configures the Execute-Disable Bit function of the computer's processor.  
This function is specific to Intel® processors and, when activated, helps to  
reduce security threats to the computer by preventing certain classes of  
malicious 'buffer overflow' attacks when combined with a supporting  
operating system such as Windows VistaTM  
.
Available  
Makes the processor's Execute-Disable Bit  
Capability available for use (Default).  
Not Available  
Disables the processor's Execute-Disable Bit  
Capability so that it is not available for use.  
On Battery  
The following settings can be changed when the Wake-up on LAN is Enabled.  
Enabled  
Enables Wake-up on LAN function when running  
from the battery.  
Disabled  
Disables Wake-up on LAN function when running  
from the battery (Default).  
Critical Battery Wake-up  
Configure what action is taken when the remaining battery power is close to  
running out while the system is in Sleep Mode. This setting is only available  
when the Critical battery action within Power Options in Windows is set to  
Hibernate. (Default)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-10  
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
(To access it, Power Options -> Change plan settings -> Change advanced  
power settings -> Battery)  
The operation of this function is dependent upon battery status.  
The Critical Battery Wake-up only operates with Windows Vista™.  
Enabled  
Disabled  
When the remaining battery power is about to run  
out while the system is in Sleep Mode, the  
system is automatically woken up and then  
switched to Hibernation Mode (Default).  
No action is taken even if the remaining battery  
power is about to run out while the system is in  
Sleep Mode.  
LCD Display Stretch  
Select the display function of the computer's display panel.  
The LCD Display Stretch is supported with some models.  
Enabled  
Display modes with low resolution are stretched  
and displayed (Default).  
Disabled  
Display modes with low resolution are not  
stretched and displayed in their original state.  
Security controller  
Please note that the security controller settings are available on the second  
page of the BIOS setup application.  
TPM  
This setting enables or disables the computer's Trusted Platform Module  
(TPM) security controller.  
Enabled  
Enable Trusted Platform Module security.  
Disabled  
Disable Trusted Platform Module security  
(default).  
Clear TPM Owner  
This setting is used to erase the data stored as part of the Trusted Platform  
Module, as would be required, for example, when disposing of the  
computer or when the owner of the computer changes. Once this operation  
is carried out, the Trusted Platform Module configuration settings are  
erased such that any encrypted data can no longer be decrypted and the  
files can no longer be read. In view of this you must ensure that you backup  
or delete the data as necessary before carrying out this operation.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-11  
HW Setup & BIOS Setup  
The procedure to follow is as detailed below:  
1. Move the cursor to the Clear TPM Owner setting and press either the  
Space key or BACK SPACE key.  
2. A message is displayed at which you should press the Y, E, S, and  
ENTER keys in sequence - the Trusted Platform Module information will  
then be erased.  
3. The Trusted Platform Module setting will then change from being  
Enable to Disabled and the setting no longer displayed.  
When using TPM, please refer to the Infineon TPM Installation Guide  
from the C:\TOSAPINS\Infineon TPM Installation Guideand  
ensure that the user reads as it contains usage information and notes on  
using TPM security.  
Diagnostic Mode  
Allows you to set whether the BIOS diagnostic test is enabled or disabled.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
The diagnostic test is disabled (Default).  
The diagnostic test is enabled.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-12  
Chapter 8  
Troubleshooting  
TOSHIBA have designed this computer for durability, however, should  
problems occur you are able to use the procedures detailed in this chapter  
to help determine the cause.  
All users should become familiar with this chapter as knowing what might  
go wrong can help prevent problems from occurring in the first place.  
Problem solving process  
Resolving problems will be much easier if you observe the following  
guidelines:  
■ Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists as taking further  
action may result in data loss or damage, or you may destroy valuable  
problem related information that can help solve the problem.  
■ Observe what is happening - write down what the system is doing and  
what actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred.  
If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen using the  
computer's PRTSC key.  
Please also be aware that the questions and procedures described in this  
chapter are meant only as a guide, they are not definitive problem solving  
techniques. In reality many problems can be solved simply, but a few may  
require help from your reseller, dealer or service provider - if you find you  
need to consult others, be prepared to describe the problem in as much  
detail as possible.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-1  
       
Troubleshooting  
Preliminary checklist  
You should always consider the simplest solution first - the items detailed in  
this checklist are easy to fix and yet can cause what appears to be a  
serious problem:  
■ Make sure you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on the  
computer - this includes your printer and any other external device you  
are using.  
■ Before you attach an external device you should first turn the computer  
off, then when you turn the computer back on again it will recognize the  
new device.  
■ Make sure all optional accessories are configured properly in the  
computer's setup program and that all required driver software has  
been loaded (please refer to the documentation included with the  
optional accessories for further information on its installation and  
configuration).  
■ Check all cables to ensure they are correctly and firmly attached to the  
computer - loose cables can cause signal errors.  
■ Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for  
loose pins.  
■ Check that your floppy diskette, CD or DVD media is correctly loaded  
and, in the case of a floppy diskette, that its write protect tab is correctly  
set.  
Always try to make detailed notes of your observations and keep them in a  
permanent error log - this will help you to describe your problems to your  
reseller, dealer or service provider. In addition, if a problem recurs, the log  
you have made will help to identify the problem faster.  
Analyzing the problem  
Sometimes the computer will give you clues that can help you identify why  
it is malfunctioning. In view of this you should keep the following questions  
in mind:  
■ Which part of the computer is not operating properly - keyboard, hard  
disk drive, display panel, touch pad, touch pad control buttons - as each  
device will produce different symptoms.  
■ Check the options within the operating system to ensure that its  
configuration is set properly.  
■ What appears on the display? Does it display any messages or random  
characters? If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen  
using the PRTSC key and, if possible, look up the messages in the  
documentation included with the computer, software or operating  
system.  
■ Check that all connecting cables are correctly and firmly attached as  
loose cables can cause erroneous or intermittent signals.  
■ Do any indicators light, if so, which ones, what color are they and do  
they stay on or blink? Write down what you see.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2  
 
Troubleshooting  
■ Do you hear any beeps, if so how many, are they long or short and are  
they high pitched or low pitched? In addition, is the computer making  
any unusual noises? Write down what you hear.  
Record your observations so you can describe them in detail to your  
reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Software  
The problems may be caused by your software or disk. If  
you cannot load a software package, the media may be  
damaged or the program might be corrupted - in these  
instances try loading another copy of the software if  
possible.  
If an error message appears while you are using a software  
package you should refer to the documentation supplied  
with it as this will usually include a problem solving section  
or a summary of error messages.  
Next, you should check any error messages against the  
operating system documentation.  
Hardware  
If you cannot find a software problem, you should then  
check the setup and configuration of your hardware. First  
run through the items in the preliminary checklist as  
described previously then, if you still cannot correct the  
problem, try to identify the source - the next section  
provides checklists for individual components and  
peripherals.  
Before using a peripheral device or application software that is not an  
authorized Toshiba part or product, make sure the device or software can  
be used with your computer. Use of incompatible devices may cause injury  
or may damage your computer.  
Hardware and system checklist  
This section discusses problems caused by your computer’s hardware or  
attached peripherals. Basic problems may occur in the following areas:  
■ System start-up  
■ Self test  
■ Power  
■ MultiMediaCard  
■ Dual Pointing Device  
■ Fingerprint Sensor  
■ USB device  
■ Password  
■ Keyboard  
■ Additional memory module  
■ Sound system  
■ External monitor  
■ i.LINK (IEEE1394) device  
■ Modem  
■ LAN  
■ Wireless LAN  
■ Bluetooth  
■ Internal display panel  
■ Hard disk drive  
■ CD-ROM drive  
■ DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive  
■ DVD Super Multi drive  
■ USB floppy diskette drive  
■ PC Card  
■ SD/SDHC Card  
■ xD picture card  
■ Recovery Discs  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-3  
   
Troubleshooting  
System start-up  
When the computer does not start properly, check the following items:  
■ Self Test  
■ Power Sources  
■ Power-on Password  
Self test  
When the computer starts up, the self test will be run automatically, and the  
following will be displayed:  
In Touch with Tomorrow  
S
TOSHIBA  
This message remains on the screen for a few seconds.  
If the self test is successful, the computer tries to load the operating system  
according to how the Boot Priority option is set within the TOSHIBA HW  
Setup program.  
If any of the following conditions are present, the self test has failed:  
■ The computer stops and does not proceed to display information or  
messages except for the TOSHIBA logo.  
■ Random characters appear on the screen and the system does not  
function normally.  
■ The screen displays an error message.  
In these instances, turn off the computer, check all cable connections and  
then restart it - if the self test fails again, contact your reseller, dealer or  
service provider.  
Power  
When the computer is not plugged into an AC power outlet, the battery  
pack is the primary power source. However, your computer also has a  
number of other power resources, including an intelligent power supply and  
a Real Time Clock (RTC) battery, all of which are interrelated with any one  
having the ability to produce apparent power problems.  
This section provides checklists for AC power and the battery. If you cannot  
resolve a problem after following them, the cause may lie with another  
power related resource - in such an instance you should contact your  
reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Overheating power down  
In the event that the computer's internal operating temperature becomes  
too high, the system will automatically enter either Hibernation Mode or  
Sleep Mode and shut itself down.  
User’s Manual  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Computer shuts down Leave the computer off until the DC IN indicator  
and DC IN indicator  
stops blinking.  
blinks orange  
It is recommended to leave the computer off until the interior reaches room  
temperature even though the DC IN indicator stops blinking.  
If the computer has reached room temperature  
and it still does not start, or if it starts but shuts  
down quickly, contact your reseller, dealer or  
service provider.  
Computer shuts down This indicates a problem with the heat dispersal  
and its DC IN indicator system - you should contact your reseller, dealer  
is flashing green  
or service provider.  
AC power  
If you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected  
you should check the status of the DC IN indicator. Please refer to Chapter  
6, Power and Power-Up Modes for further information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
AC adaptor doesn’t  
power the computer  
Check the connections to make sure that the  
power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the  
(DC IN indicator does computer and a working power outlet.  
not glow green)  
Check the condition of the cord and terminals. If  
the cord is frayed or damaged it should be  
replaced, while if the terminals are soiled, they  
should be cleaned with a clean cotton cloth.  
If the AC adaptor still does not power the  
computer, you should contact your reseller,  
dealer or service provider.  
Battery  
If you suspect a problem with the battery, you should check the status of  
the DC IN indicator as well as the Battery indicator. Please refer to Chapter  
6, Power and Power-Up Modes for more information on these indicators,  
together with general battery operation.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Battery doesn’t power The battery may be discharged - connect the AC  
the computer adaptor to recharge the battery.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-5  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Battery doesn’t charge If the battery is completely discharged, it will not  
when the AC adaptor is begin charging immediately, in these instances  
attached (Battery  
you should wait a few minutes before trying again.  
indicator does not glow If the battery still does not charge, you should  
orange).  
check that the power outlet the AC adaptor is  
connected to is supplying power - this can be  
tested by plugging another appliance into it.  
Check whether the battery is hot or cold to the  
touch - if so, it will not charge properly and should  
be allowed to reach room temperature before  
you try again.  
Unplug the AC adaptor and remove the battery to  
make sure its connecting terminals are clean - if  
necessary wipe them with a soft dry cloth lightly  
dipped in alcohol.  
Connect the AC adaptor and replace the battery,  
taking care to ensure that it is securely seated in  
the computer.  
Check the Battery indicator - if it does not glow,  
allow the computer to charge the battery for at  
least twenty minutes. If the Battery indicator  
starts to glow after this period, allow the battery  
to continue to charge for at least another twenty  
minutes before turning on the computer.  
However, if the indicator still does not glow, the  
battery may be at the end of its operating life and  
should be replaced. However, if you do not  
believe the battery is at the end of its operating  
life, you should speak to your reseller, dealer or  
service provider.  
Battery doesn’t power If you frequently recharge a partially charged  
the computer as long as battery, the battery might not charge to its full  
expected  
potential - in these instances you should fully  
discharge the battery and then attempt to charge  
it again.  
Check the Power saver option under Select a  
power plan in the Power Options.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-6  
Troubleshooting  
Real Time Clock  
Problem  
Procedure  
The following message The charge in the Real Time Clock (RTC) battery  
is Displayed on the  
screen:  
has run out - you will need to set the date and  
time in the BIOS setup application by using the  
following steps:  
RTC battery is  
low or CMOS  
1. Press the F1 key - the BIOS setup application  
checksum is  
will load.  
inconsistent.  
Press [F1] key to  
set Date/Time.  
2. Set the date in the System Date field.  
3. Set the time in the System Time field.  
4. Press the END key - a confirmation message  
will be displayed.  
5. Press the Y key - the BIOS setup application  
will end and the computer will restart.  
Password  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot enter password Please refer to the TOSHIBA Password Utility  
section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes for further information.  
Keyboard  
Keyboard problems can be caused by the setup and configuration of the  
computer - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for further information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Some letter keys  
produce numbers  
Check that the numeric keypad overlay is not  
activated - press the FN + F11 hot key and try  
typing again.  
Output to screen is  
garbled  
Please refer to your software's documentation to  
ensure that its is not remapping the keyboard in  
any way (remapping involves changing or  
reassigning the function of each key).  
If you are still unable to use the keyboard, you  
should contact your reseller, dealer or service  
provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7  
       
Troubleshooting  
Internal display panel  
Apparent computer's display panel problems may be related to the  
computer's setup and configuration - please refer to Chapter 7, HW Setup  
& BIOS Setup, for further information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
No display  
Press the FN + F5 hot keys to adjust the display  
priority, and to make sure it is not set for output to  
an external monitor.  
Markings appear on the These marks may have come from contact with  
computer's display  
panel.  
the keyboard and Touch Pad while the display  
panel has been closed. You should try to remove  
the marks by gently wiping the display panel with  
a clean dry cloth or, if this fails, with a good  
quality LCD screen cleaner. In this latter instance  
you should always follow the instructions with the  
screen cleaner and always ensure you let the  
display panel dry properly before closing it.  
Problems above remain You should initially refer to the documentation  
unresolved or other  
problems occur  
supplied with you software to determine if it is  
this that is causing the problems. Alternatively  
you may wish to run the TOSHIBA PC  
Diagnostic Tool to check the general operation  
of the computer.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Hard disk drive  
Problem  
Procedure  
Computer does not boot Check to see whether that is a floppy diskette in  
from hard disk drive  
the floppy diskette drive or a CD-ROM/DVD-  
ROM in the optical disc drive - if so remove it and  
try to start the computer again.  
If this has no effect, check the Boot Priority  
setting within the TOSHIBA HW Setup utility -  
please refer to the Boot Priority section in  
Chapter 7, HW Setup & BIOS Setup for further  
information.  
Please refer to your operating system  
documentation in order to determine whether  
there is a problem with any of the operating  
system files or settings.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-8  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Slow performance  
The files on the hard disk drive may be  
fragmented - in this instance you should run the  
disk Defragmentation utility to check the  
condition of your files and the hard disk drive.  
Please refer to the operating system's  
documentation or online Help File for further  
information on running and using the  
Defragmentation utility.  
As a last resort you should reformat the hard disk  
drive and then reload the operating system and  
all other files and data. If you are still unable to  
resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer  
or service provider.  
CD-ROM drive  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot access a  
CD in the drive  
Make sure the drive’s disc tray is securely  
closed. Press gently until it clicks into place.  
Open the disc tray and make sure the CD is  
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label  
facing up.  
A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser  
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there  
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.  
Check whether the CD is dirty. If it is, wipe it with  
a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral cleaner.  
Refer to the Media care section in Chapter 4 for  
details on cleaning.  
Some CDs run  
The software or hardware configuration may be  
correctly, but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware  
not  
configuration matches your software’s needs.  
Check the CD’s documentation.  
Check the type of CD you are using. The drive  
supports:  
CD-ROM:  
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM  
(single/multi-session), CD-  
ROM Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-  
ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1,  
Form2), Enhanced CD (CD-  
EXTRA), Addressing Method 2  
Recordable CD: CD-R, CD-RW  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-9  
 
Troubleshooting  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot access a  
CD/DVD in the drive  
Make sure the drive’s disc tray is securely  
closed. Press gently until it clicks into place.  
Open the disc tray and make sure the CD/DVD is  
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label  
facing up.  
A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser  
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there  
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.  
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe it  
with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral  
cleaner. Refer to the Media care section in  
Chapter 4 for details on cleaning.  
Some CD/DVDs run  
The software or hardware configuration may be  
correctly, but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware  
not  
configuration matches your software’s needs.  
Check the CD/DVD’s documentation.  
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The  
drive supports:  
DVD-ROM:  
CD-ROM:  
DVD-ROM, DVD-Video  
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM  
(single/multi-session), CD-  
ROM Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-  
ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1,  
Form2), Enhanced CD (CD-  
EXTRA), Addressing Method 2  
Recordable CD: CD-R, CD-RW  
Check the region code on the DVD. It must  
match that on the DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive.  
Region codes are listed in the Optical disc drives  
section in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-10  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot write correctly If you have trouble writing, make sure you are  
observing the following precautions:  
■ Use only media recommended by TOSHIBA.  
■ Do not use the mouse or keyboard during  
writing.  
■ Use only the software supplied with the  
computer for recording.  
■ Do not run or start other software during  
writing.  
■ Do not jar the computer during writing.  
■ Do not connect/disconnect external devices  
or install/remove internal cards during writing.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
DVD Super Multi drive  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot access  
Make sure the drive’s disc tray is securely  
closed.  
Press gently until it clicks into place.  
a CD/DVD in the drive  
Open the disc tray and make sure the CD/DVD is  
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label  
facing up.  
A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser  
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there  
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.  
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe it  
with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral  
cleaner. Refer to the Media care section in  
Chapter 4 for details on cleaning.  
Some CD/DVDs run  
The software or hardware configuration may be  
correctly, but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware  
not  
configuration matches your software’s needs.  
Check the CD/DVD's documentation.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-11  
   
Troubleshooting  
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The  
drive supports:  
DVD-ROM: DVD-ROM, DVD-Video  
CD-ROM:  
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM  
(single/multi-session), CD-ROM  
Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-ROM XA  
Mode 2 (Form1, Form2), Enhanced  
CD (CD-EXTRA), Addressing  
Method 2  
Recordable DVD: DVD-R/-R DL, DVD+R/+R DL,  
DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM  
Check the region code on the DVD. It must  
match that on the DVD Super Multi drive. Region  
codes are listed in the Optical disc drives section  
in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.  
USB floppy diskette drive  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and  
Options.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Drive does not operate Check the connection between the computer and  
the drive to ensure that it is properly attached.  
Some programs run  
The computer's software or hardware  
correctly but others do configuration may be causing a problem - ensure  
not  
that these configurations match your  
requirements (refer to any relevant  
documentation, for example that supplied with  
any software in use, for further information).  
You cannot access the Try another floppy diskette in the drive - if you are  
external floppy diskette able to access this disk then it indicates the  
drive  
original disk and not the drive is probably causing  
the problem.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-12  
   
Troubleshooting  
PC Card  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and  
Options.  
Problem  
Procedure  
PC Card error occurs  
Remove the PC Card from the computer and  
then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly  
connected.  
In the event that the PC Card is attached to an  
external peripheral device, ensure that this  
connection is properly made.  
If the problem persists, then you should refer to  
the documentation supplied with your PC Card  
for further information.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
SD/SDHC Card  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and  
Options.  
Problem  
Procedure  
SD/SDHC Card error  
occurs  
Remove the SD/SDHC Card from the computer  
and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly  
connected.  
If the problem persists, then you should refer to  
the documentation supplied with your SD/SDHC  
Card for further information.  
You cannot write to an Remove the SD/SDHC Card from the computer  
SD/SDHC Card and check to ensure that it is not write protected.  
You cannot read a file Check to ensure the required file is actually on  
the SD/SDHC Card that is inserted into the  
computer.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-13  
       
Troubleshooting  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo  
Refer also to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Memory Stick/Memory Reseat the Memory Stick/Memory Stick  
Stick PRO/Memory  
Stick PRO Duo error  
occurs  
PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo to make sure it is  
firmly connected.  
Check the card’s documentation.  
You cannot write to a  
Make sure the Memory Stick/Memory Stick  
Memory Stick/Memory PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo is not write  
Stick PRO/Memory  
Stick PRO Duo  
protected.  
You cannot read a file Make sure the target file is on the Memory  
Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo  
inserted in the slot.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
xD picture card  
Refer also to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.  
Problem  
Procedure  
xD picture card error  
occurs  
Reseat the xD picture card to make sure it is  
firmly connected.  
Check the card’s documentation.  
You cannot read a file Make sure the target file is on the xD picture card  
inserted in the slot.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
MultiMediaCard  
Refer also to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.  
Problem  
Procedure  
MultiMediaCard error  
occurs  
Reseat the MultiMediaCard to make sure it is  
firmly connected.  
Check the MultiMediaCard’s documentation.  
You cannot write to an Make sure the MultiMediaCard is not write  
MultiMediaCard protected.  
You cannot read a file Make sure the target file is on the  
MultiMediaCard inserted in the slot.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-14  
           
Troubleshooting  
Dual Pointing device  
If you are using a USB mouse, you should also refer to both the USB  
device section in this chapter, and the documentation supplied with your  
mouse.  
Touch Pad/AccuPoint  
Problem  
Procedure  
Either the Touch Pad  
or the AccuPoint does  
not work.  
Check the Device Select settings.  
Click Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware and  
Sound -> Mouse icon.  
Pressing FN + F9 to enable.  
On-screen pointer does In this instance the system might be busy - if the  
not respond to pointing pointer is shaped as an hourglass, wait for it to  
device operation  
return to its normal shape and then try again to  
move it.  
Double-tapping(Touch In this instance, you should initially try changing  
Pad) or double-  
clicking (AccuPoint)  
does not work  
the double-click speed setting within the Mouse  
Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control  
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse  
icon.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Buttons tab.  
3. Set the double-click speed as required and  
click OK.  
The mouse pointer  
moves too fast or too  
slow  
In this instance, you should initially try changing  
the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control  
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse  
icon.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Pointer Options tab.  
3. Set the pointer speed as required and click  
OK.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-15  
     
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
The reaction of Touch Adjust the touch Sensitivity.  
pad is either too  
1. Click Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware  
sensitive or not  
sensitive enough.  
and Sound -> Mouse icon.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Advanced tab.  
3. Click the Advanced feature settings button.  
4. Advanced feature settings is displayed.  
5. Move the slide of adjust the pointer speed in  
relation to the standard Windows setting.  
Click the OK button.  
6. Click the OK button on Advanced feature  
setting screen.  
USB mouse  
Problem  
Procedure  
On-screen pointer does In this instance the system might be busy - if the  
not respond to mouse pointer is shaped as an hourglass, wait for it to  
operation  
return to its normal shape and then try again to  
move it.  
Remove the mouse from the computer and then  
reconnect it to a free USB port it in order to  
ensure it is firmly attached.  
Double-clicking does  
not work  
In this instance, you should initially try changing  
the double-click speed setting within the Mouse  
Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control  
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse  
icon.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Buttons tab.  
3. Set the double-click speed as required and  
click OK.  
The mouse pointer  
moves too fast or too  
slow  
In this instance, you should initially try changing  
the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control  
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse  
icon.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Pointer Options tab.  
3. Set the pointer speed as required and click  
OK.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-16  
 
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
The mouse pointer  
moves erratically  
The elements of the mouse responsible for  
detecting movement might be dirty - please refer  
to the documentation supplied with the mouse for  
instructions on how to clean it.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Fingerprint Sensor  
Problem  
Procedure  
Reading of the  
fingerprint was not  
successful.  
In this instance you should try the fingerprint  
reading operation again using the correct finger  
position - please refer to Using the Fingerprint  
Sensor in Chapter 4, Operating Basics for further  
information.  
Alternatively, you should try the recognition  
process again using another enrolled finger.  
The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes  
the unique characteristics in a fingerprint.  
However, there may be instances where certain  
users are unable to register their fingerprints due  
to insufficient unique characteristics in their  
fingerprints.  
The recognition success rate may differ from  
user to user.  
The fingerprint cannot In this instance you should try the recognition  
be read due to injuries process again using another enrolled finger.  
to the finger.  
However, if fingerprints from all the enrolled  
fingers cannot be read, you should instead log  
into the computer by using the keyboard to input  
the password.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-17  
   
Troubleshooting  
USB device  
In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the  
documentation supplied with your USB device.  
Problem  
Procedure  
USB device does not  
work  
Remove the USB device from the computer and  
then reconnect it to a free port it in order to  
ensure it is firmly attached.  
Ensure that any required USB device drivers are  
properly installed - to achieve this you should  
refer to both the device documentation and the  
operating system documentation.  
If you are using an operating system that does  
not support USB, you are still able to use a USB  
mouse and/or USB keyboard by setting the USB  
KB/Mouse Emulation option within the  
TOSHIBA HW Setup utility to Enabled.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Additional memory module  
Please also refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options, for further  
information on installing and removing memory modules.  
Problem  
Procedure  
If there is a memory  
In the event of power LED flashes when the  
malfunction, the power computer is turned on you should initially ensure  
LED will repeatedly that the installed memory module(s) are  
flash (on for 0.5 second, compatible with the computer. If you determine  
off for 0.5 second) in the that an incompatible module has been installed,  
following patterns;  
you should follow the steps as detailed below:  
If there is an error only 1. Turn off the computer.  
in Slot A or no memory  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripheral  
module is inserted in  
Slot A: orange twice,  
then green once.  
devices.  
3. Remove the battery pack.  
4. Remove the incompatible memory module.  
If there is an error in  
Slot B: orange once,  
then green twice.  
5. Install the battery and/or connect the AC  
adaptor.  
6. Turn on the computer.  
If there are errors in  
both Slot A and Slot B:  
orange twice, then  
green twice.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-18  
         
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
An error will occur if a Remove the memory module from Slot B and  
memory module is  
inserted into Slot B  
when no memory  
module is inserted in  
Slot A.  
insert it into Slot A.  
Sound system  
In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the  
documentation supplied with your audio device.  
Problem  
Procedure  
No sound is heard  
Adjust the volume control dial.  
Check the software volume settings.  
Please check to see if Mute is turned to Off  
Check to make sure the headphone connection  
is secure.  
Check within the Windows Device Manager  
application to ensure the sound function is  
enabled and that settings for elements such as  
I/O port address, interrupt level and DMA  
channel are correct for your software, and that  
they do not conflict with any other hardware  
devices connected to the computer.  
For further information on these settings, please  
refer to the documentation supplied with your  
audio device.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Annoying sound is  
heard  
In this instance you may be experiencing  
feedback from either the internal microphone or  
an external microphone connected to the  
computer - please refer to Sound System in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics for further  
information.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-19  
   
Troubleshooting  
External monitor  
Please also refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options, and to the  
documentation supplied with your monitor for further information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Monitor does not turn  
on  
After confirming that the monitor's power switch  
is on, you should check the connections to make  
sure that the power cord/adaptor is firmly  
connected to the monitor and to a working power  
outlet.  
No display  
Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls  
on the external monitor.  
Press the FN + F5 hot key in order to change the  
display priority and ensure that it is not set for the  
internal display only.  
Check to see if the external monitor is connected.  
When the external monitor is set as the primary  
display device in extended desktop mode, it will  
not display when the computer wakes up from  
Sleep Mode if the external monitor is  
disconnected while in Sleep Mode.  
To keep this from happening, do not disconnect  
the external monitor when the computer is in  
Sleep or Hibernation Mode. Remember to turn off  
the computer before disconnecting the external  
monitor.  
When the display panel and an external monitor  
are set to clone mode and they are turned off by  
the timer, the display panel or the external  
monitor may not display when turned on again.  
If this occurs, press FN + F5 to re-set the display  
panel and the external monitor to clone mode.  
Display error occurs  
Check that the cable connecting the external  
monitor to the computer is firmly attached.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-20  
   
Troubleshooting  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device  
Problem  
Procedure  
i.LINK device does not Make sure the cable is securely connected to the  
function  
computer and to the device.  
Make sure the device’s power is turned on.  
Reinstall the drivers. Open the Windows  
Control Panel and double-click the Add  
Hardware icon. Follow the on-screen  
directions.  
Restart Windows.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
Modem  
Refer to Appendix C, AT Commands and Appendix D, S-registers.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Communication  
Make sure the computer’s internal modem  
software can’t initialize settings are correct. Refer to Phone and Modem  
modem  
Properties in the Control Panel.  
You can hear a dial  
If the call is going through a PBX machine, make  
tone but can’t make a sure the communication application’s tone dial  
call  
detection feature is disabled.  
You can also use the ATX command. Refer to  
Appendix C, AT Commands.  
You place a call, but a Make sure the settings are correct in your  
connection can’t be  
communications application.  
made  
After making a call you Make sure the tone or pulse selection in your  
can’t hear a ring  
communications application is set correctly.  
You can also use the ATD command. Refer to  
Appendix C, AT Commands.  
Communication is cut The computer will automatically cut off  
off unexpectedly  
communication when connection with the carrier  
is not successful for a set time interval. Try  
lengthening this time interval.  
A CONNECTdisplay is Check the error control setting in your  
quickly replaced by NO communications application.  
CARRIER  
You can also use the AT\N command. Refer to  
Appendix C, AT Commands.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-21  
       
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Character display  
becomes garbled  
during a  
In data transmission, make sure the parity bit and  
stop bit settings correspond with those of the  
remote computer.  
communication  
session  
Check the flow control and communication  
protocol.  
You cannot receive an Check the rings before auto answer setting in  
incoming call  
your communications application.  
You can also use the ATS0 command. Refer to  
Appendix D, S-registers.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
LAN  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access LAN  
Check for a firm cable connection between the  
LAN jack and the LAN hub.  
Wake-up on LAN does Make sure the AC adaptor is connected. The  
not work  
Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even  
when the system is off.  
If problems persist, consult your LAN  
administrator.  
Wireless LAN  
If the following procedures do not restore LAN access, consult your LAN  
administrator. For more information on wireless communication, refer to  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access  
Wireless LAN  
Make sure the computer's Wireless  
communication switch is set to on.  
If problems persist, contact your LAN  
administrator.  
Bluetooth  
For further information on Bluetooth wireless communication, please refer  
to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access  
Bluetooth device  
Check to ensure the computer's Wireless  
Communication Switch is set to on.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-22  
         
Troubleshooting  
Check to ensure the Bluetooth Manager  
application is running on the computer and that  
power to the external Bluetooth device is turned  
on.  
Check to ensure that no optional Bluetooth  
Adaptor is installed in the computer - the built-in  
Bluetooth hardware cannot operate  
simultaneously with another Bluetooth controller.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Recovery Discs  
Problem  
Procedure  
The following  
message appears  
when executing  
Recovery Disc  
Creator.  
You will see this message if you have previously  
chosen to remove the partition and are trying to  
create "Recovery Media". When there is no  
recovery partition, the Recovery Disc Creator  
cannot make Recovery Media. However, if you  
have already created a "Recovery Media", you  
can use it to restore the recovery partition.  
Simply follow the instructions in Restoring the  
pre-installed software from your created  
Recovery Discs section in this manual. You will  
be directed to select "Restore Original Factory  
Image" from the drop-down menu. If you have  
not created "Recovery Media", please contact  
TOSHIBA support for assistance.  
"The Recovery  
Disc Creator can  
not be launched  
because there is  
no recovery  
partition."  
Disposing of the computer and the computer's batteries  
■ Discard this computer in accordance with applicable laws and  
regulations. For further information, contact your local government.  
■ This computer contains rechargeable batteries. After repeated use, the  
batteries will finally lose their ability to hold a charge and you will need  
to replace them. Under certain applicable laws and regulation, it may be  
illegal to dispose of old batteries by placing them in the trash.  
■ Please be kind to our shared environment. Check with your local  
government authority for details regarding where to recycle old batteries  
or how to dispose of them properly. This product contains mercury.  
Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental  
considerations. For disposal, reuse or recycling information, please  
contact your local government.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-23  
Troubleshooting  
■ If your hard disk drive or other storage media contains sensitive data,  
you should be aware that standard deletion procedures do not remove  
data from the media. These standard deletion procedures include:  
■ Selecting Delete for a target file  
■ Putting files in the Recycle Bin and emptying the Recycle Bin  
■ Reformatting the media  
■ Reinstalling an operating system from the recovery CD-ROM  
The procedures above delete only the initial part of the data used for file  
management. This makes the file invisible to the operating system, but  
the data can still be read by specialized utilities. If you dispose of the  
computer, please delete all the data on its hard disk drive. Doing so  
prevents unauthorized use of such data. To ensure your data is not  
used for unauthorized purposes, you can:  
■ Physically destroy the hard disk drive  
■ Use a proven specialized utility to overwrite all data  
■ Take the hard disk drive to a professional deletion service  
All data deletion costs will be borne by you.  
TOSHIBA support  
If you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having  
problems operating the computer, you may need to contact TOSHIBA for  
additional technical assistance.  
Before you call  
Some problems you experience may be related to software or the operating  
system so it is important that you investigate other sources of assistance  
first. Before contacting TOSHIBA, try the following:  
■ Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation supplied with  
your software and/or peripheral devices.  
■ If a problem occurs when you are running software applications, consult  
the software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions and  
consider calling the software company's technical support department  
for assistance.  
■ Consult the reseller or dealer from where you purchased your computer  
and/or software - they are your best resource for current information  
and support.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-24  
     
Troubleshooting  
Where to write  
If you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware  
related, write to TOSHIBA at the nearest location listed below:  
Outside of Europe  
In Europe  
Australia  
Germany & Austria  
TOSHIBA Australia Pty. Ltd.  
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH  
Information Systems Division 84-92 Geschäftsbereich,  
Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W. Deutschland-Österreich  
2113 Sydney  
Hammfelddamm 8, D-41460 Neuss,  
Germany  
Canada  
France  
TOSHIBA of Canada Ltd.  
191 McNabb Street, Markham,  
Ontario L3R 8H2  
TOSHIBA Systèms France S.A.  
7, Rue Ampère B.P. 131, 92804  
Puteaux Cedex  
China  
Netherlands  
TOSHIBA Personal Computer &  
Network (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.  
TOSHIBA Information Systems,  
Benelux B.V.  
43F, Hong Kong New World Tower, Rivium Boulevard 41 2909 LK  
No. 300 Huaihai Zhong Road,  
Shanghai, P. R. China 200021  
Capelle a/d IJssel  
Singapore  
Spain  
TOSHIBA Singapore Pte. Ltd.  
438B Alexandra Road #06-01  
Alexandra Technopark Singapore  
119968  
TOSHIBA Information Systems,  
ESPAÑA  
Parque Empresarial San Fernando  
a
Edificio Europa, l Planta, Escalera A  
28830 Madrid  
United States of America  
United Kingdom  
TOSHIBA America Information  
Systems, Inc.  
9740 Irvine Boulevard Irvine,  
TOSHIBA Information Systems  
(U.K.) Ltd.  
TOSHIBA Court Weybridge  
Business Park Addlestone Road  
Weybridge, Surrey KT15 2UL  
California 92618 USA  
The Rest of Europe  
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH  
Geschäftsbereich, Deutschland-  
Österreich Hammfelddamm 8, D-  
41460 Neuss, Germany  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-25  
Appendix A  
Specifications  
This appendix summarizes the computer’s technical specifications.  
Physical Dimensions  
Refer to User Information Guide about Weight and Size.  
Environmental Requirements  
Conditions  
Ambient temperature  
5°C (41°F) to 35°C (95°F)  
Relative humidity  
Operating  
20% to 80%  
Non-operating  
Thermal Gradient  
-20°C (-4°F) to 65°C (149°F) 10% to 90%  
20°C per hour maximum  
Wet-bulb  
26°C maximum  
temperature  
Conditions  
Operating  
Altitude (from sea level)  
-60 to 3,000 meters  
Non-operating  
-60 to 10,000 meters  
maximum  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-1  
       
Specifications  
Power Requirements  
AC adaptor  
100-240 volts AC  
50 or 60 hertz (cycles per second)  
15 V DC  
Computer  
5.0 amperes  
Built-in Modem  
Network control unit (NCU)  
Type of NCU  
Type of line  
AA  
Telephone line (analog only)  
Type of dialing  
Pulse  
Tone  
Control command  
AT commands  
EIA-578 commands  
Monitor function  
Computer’s speaker  
Communication specifications  
Communication  
system  
Data:  
Fax:  
Full duplex  
Half duplex  
Communication  
protocol  
Data  
ITU-T-Rec  
V.21/V.22/V.22bis/V.32  
(Former CCITT)  
Bell  
/V.32bis/V.34/V.90  
103/212A  
Fax  
ITU-T-Rec  
(Former CCITT)  
V.17/V.29/V.27ter  
/V.21 ch2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-2  
Specifications  
Communication  
speed  
Data transmission and reception  
300/1200/2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400/16  
800/19200/21600/24000/26400/28800/31200/33  
600 bps  
Data reception only with V.90  
28000/29333/30666/32000/33333/34666/36000/  
37333/38666/40000/41333/42666/44000/45333/  
46666/48000/49333/50666/52000/53333/54666/  
56000 bps  
Fax  
2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400 bps  
Transmitting level  
Receiving level  
-10 dBm  
-10 to -40 dBm  
600 ohms ±30%  
Input/output  
impedance  
Error correcting  
Data compression  
Power supply  
MNP class 4 and ITU-T V.42  
MNP class 5 and ITU-T V.42bis  
+3.3V (supplied by computer)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-3  
Appendix B  
Display Controller and Video mode  
Display controller  
The display controller interprets software commands into hardware  
commands that turn particular parts on the screen on or off.  
Due to the display panel's increased resolution, lines may appear broken in  
when displaying images in full-screen text mode.  
The display controller also controls the video mode and uses industry  
standard rules to govern the screen resolution and the maximum number of  
colors that can be displayed at any one time. Therefore, software written for  
a given video mode will run on any computer that supports that mode.  
Video mode  
Video mode settings are configured via the Display Properties dialog.  
To open the Display Properties dialog, click Start -> Control Panel ->  
Appearance and Personalization -> Personalization -> Display  
Settings.  
If you are running some applications (for example a 3D application or video  
playback and so on), you may see some disturbance, flickering or frame  
dropping on your screen.  
If that occurs, adjust the resolution of display, lowering it until the screen is  
displayed properly.  
You could also disable Windows AeroTM to help correct this situation.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-1  
           
Appendix C  
AT Commands  
In most cases, you will not need to type AT commands manually. However,  
there might be some occasions when you will need to do so.  
This chapter describes AT commands for data mode. Fax and voice  
commands are taken care of by application software.  
The format for entering AT commands is:  
ATXn  
where X is the AT command, and n is the specific value for that command.  
After you type in the command press ENTER.  
Any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either text or  
numeric values known as result codes.  
All commands and command-values accepted by the modem are  
described in this section; any entry other than those listed results in an  
error.  
+++ Escape sequence  
The escape sequence allows the modem to exit data mode and enter on-  
line command mode. While in on-line command mode, you can  
communicate directly to your modem using AT commands. Once you finish,  
you can return to data mode using the ATO command.  
A pause, the length of which is set by Escape Guard Time (S12), must be  
completed after an escape sequence is entered. This pause prevents the  
modem from interpreting the escape sequence as data.  
The value of the escape sequence character may be changed using  
register S2.  
A/  
Repeat last command  
This command repeats the last command string entered. Do not precede  
this command with an AT prefix or conclude it by pressing ENTER.  
User’s Manual  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AT Commands  
A
Answer command  
This command instructs the modem to go off-hook and answer an incoming  
call.  
Bn  
Communication standard setting  
This command determines the communication standard CCITT or Bell.  
B0  
B1  
Selects CCITT V.22 mode when the modem is at 1200 bps.  
Selects Bell 212A when the modem is at 1200 bps (default).  
B15 Selects V.21 when the modem is at 300 bps.  
B16 Selects Bell 103J when the modem is at 300 bps (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,15,16  
ERROROtherwise  
Dn  
Dial  
This command instructs the modem to dial a telephone number. Enter n  
(the telephone number and any modifiers) after the ATD command.  
Any digit or symbol (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D) may be dialed as touch-tone  
digits. Characters such as spaces, hyphens, and parentheses do not count.  
They are ignored by the modem, but you may want to include them to make  
the number and modifiers easier to read.  
The following may be used as phone number modifiers:  
P
T
,
Pulse dialing.  
Touch-tone dialing (default).  
Pause during dialing. Pause for time specified in Register S8  
before processing the next character in the dial string.  
W
@
Wait for dial tone. Modem waits for a second dial tone before  
processing the dial string.  
Wait for quiet answer. Wait for five seconds of silence after  
dialing the number. If silence is not detected, the modem  
sends a NO ANSWER result code back to the caller.  
!
;
Hook flash. Causes the modem to go on-hook for 0.5  
seconds and then return to off-hook.  
Return to command mode. Causes the modem to return to  
command mode after dialing a number, without  
disconnecting the call.  
S=n Dial a telephone number previously stored using the &Zn=X  
command (See &Zn=X command for more information). The  
range is 0-3.  
En  
Echo command  
This command controls whether or not the characters entered from your  
computer keyboard are displayed on your monitor (echoed) while the  
modem is in command mode.  
User’s Manual  
C-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Commands  
E0  
E1  
Disables echo to the computer.  
Enables echo to the computer (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
Hn  
Hook control  
This command instructs the modem to go on-hook to disconnect a call, or  
off-hook to make the phone line busy.  
H0  
H1  
Modem goes on-hook (default).  
Modem goes off-hook.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
In  
Request ID information  
This command displays product information about the modem.  
I0  
I3  
I9  
Returns modem identity string and driver version number.  
Same as I0.  
Returns region ID in English.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,3,9  
ERROROtherwise  
Ln  
Monitor speaker volume  
This command sets speaker volume to low, medium, or high.  
L0  
L1  
L2  
L3  
Low volume.  
Low volume. (Same as L0)  
Medium volume (default).  
High volume.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3  
ERROROtherwise  
Mn Monitor speaker mode  
This command turns the speaker on or off.  
M0  
M1  
The speaker is off.  
The speaker is on until the modem detects the carrier signal  
(default).  
M2  
M3  
The speaker is always on when modem is off-hook.  
Speaker is on until the carrier is detected, except when  
dialing.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-3  
AT Commands  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3  
ERROROtherwise  
Nn  
Modulation handshake  
This command controls whether or not the local modem performs a  
negotiated handshake at connection time with the remote modem when the  
communication speed of the two modems is different.  
N0  
When originating or answering, this is for handshake only at  
the communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB  
command.  
N1  
When originating or answering, begin the handshake at the  
communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB  
command (default).  
During handshake, a lower transmission speed may be  
selected.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
On Return on-line to data mode  
O0  
O1  
O3  
Instructs the modem to exit on-line command mode and  
return to data mode (see AT escape sequence, +++).  
This command issues a retrain before returning to on-line  
data mode.  
This command issues a rate renegotiation before returning to  
on-line data mode.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1,3  
ERROROtherwise  
P
Select pulse dialing  
This command configures the modem for pulse (non touch-tone) dialing.  
Dialed digits are pulsed until a T command or dial modifier is received.  
Tone dial is the default setting.  
Qn Result code control  
Result codes are informational messages sent from the modem and  
displayed on your monitor. Basic result codes are OK, CONNECT, RING,  
NO CARRIER, and ERROR. The ATQ command allows the user to turn  
result codes on or off.  
Q0  
Enables modem to send result codes to the computer  
(default).  
Q1  
Disables modem from sending result codes to the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-4  
AT Commands  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
T
Select tone dialing  
This command instructs the modem to send DTMF tones while dialing.  
Dialed digits are tone dialed until a P command or dial modifier is received.  
This is the default setting.  
Vn  
DCE response format  
This command controls whether result codes (including call progress and  
negotiation progress messages) are displayed as words or their numeric  
equivalents.  
V0  
V1  
Displays result codes as digits.  
Displays result codes as text (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
Xn  
Result code selection, call progress monitoring  
This command selects which result codes will be used by the modem.  
Command Dial tone  
detect  
Busy  
signal  
Supported Result Code  
detect  
X0  
X1  
X2  
X3  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER,  
ERROR  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
CONNECT <RATE>  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
NODIALTONE, CONNECT <RATE>  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, BUSY,  
CONNECT <RATE>, BLACKLISTED  
X4 (default) Enable  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT <RATE>,  
DELAYED, BLACKLISTED, REORDER,  
WARBLE, CALL WAITING DETECTED  
X5  
Enable  
Enable  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT <RATE>,  
RRING, NO BONGTONE, DELAYED,  
BLACKLISTED, REORDER, WARBLE, CALL  
WAITING DETECTED  
User’s Manual  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Commands  
Dial tone detect  
Disabled:The modem dials a call regardless of whether it detects a dial  
tone.  
Enabled:The modem dials only upon detection of a dial tone, and  
disconnects the call if the dial tone is not detected within 10  
seconds.  
Busy tone detect  
Disabled:The modem ignores any busy tones it receives.  
Enabled:The modem monitors for busy tones.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3,4,5  
ERROROtherwise  
Zn  
Recall stored profile  
The modem performs a soft reset and restores (recalls) the configuration  
profile according to the parameter supplied. If no parameter is specified,  
zero is assumed. Either Z0 or Z1 restores the profile.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
&Cn Data Carrier Detect (DCD) control  
Data Carrier Detect is a signal from the modem to the computer indicating  
that a carrier signal is being received from a remote modem. DCD normally  
turns off when the modem no longer detects the carrier signal.  
&C0 The state of the carrier from the remote modem is ignored.  
DCD circuit is always on.  
&C1 DCD turns on when the remote modem’s carrier signal is  
detected, and off when the carrier signal is not detected  
(default).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
&Dn DTR control  
This command interprets how the modem responds to the state of the DTR  
signal and changes to the DTR signal.  
&D0 Ignore. The modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats  
it as always on. This should only be used if your  
communication software does not provide DTR to the  
modem  
&D1 If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode,  
the modem enters command mode, issues an OK result  
code, and remains connected.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-6  
AT Commands  
&D2 If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode,  
the modem disconnects (default).  
&D3 Reset on the on-to-off DTR transition.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3  
ERROROtherwise  
&F  
Load factory settings  
This command loads the configuration stored and programmed at the  
factory. This operation replaces all of the command options and the S-  
register settings in the active configuration with factory values.  
&F  
Recall factory setting as active configuration.  
&Gn V.22bis guard tone control  
This command determines which guard tone, if any, to transmit while  
transmitting in the high band (answer mode). This command is only used in  
V.22 and V.22bis mode. This option is not used in North America and is for  
international use only.  
&G0 Guard tone disabled (default).  
&G1 Sets guard tone to 550 Hz.  
&G2 Sets guard tone to 1800 Hz.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2  
ERROROtherwise  
&Kn Local flow control selection  
&K0 Disable flow control.  
&K3 Enable CTS/RTS flow control (default).  
&K4 Enable XON/XOFF flow control.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,3,4  
ERROROtherwise  
&Pn Select Pulse Dial Make/Break Ratio (WW)  
&P0 Selects 39% - 61% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per  
second.  
&P1 Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per  
second.  
&P2 Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 20 pulses per  
second.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2  
ERROROtherwise  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-7  
AT Commands  
&Tn Self-test commands  
These tests can help to isolate problems if you experience periodic data  
loss or random errors.  
&T0 Abort. Stops any test in progress.  
&T1 Local analog loop. This test verifies modem operation, as  
well as the connection between the modem and computer.  
Any data entered at the local DTE is modulated, then  
demodulated, and returned to the local DTE. To work  
properly, the modem must be off-line.  
Result Codes:  
OKn=0  
CONNECTn=1  
ERROROtherwise  
&V Display Current Configuration  
This command displays the current configuration of the modem. If  
nonvolatile memory is supported the stored profiles are displayed as well.  
&V  
View profiles.  
&W Store current configuration  
Saves the current (active) configuration (profile), including S-Registers.  
The current configuration comprises a list of storable parameters illustrated  
in the &V command. These settings are restored to the active configuration  
upon receiving a Zn command or at power up. Refer to the &V command.  
&W Stores the current configuration.  
&Zn=x Store telephone number  
This command is used to store up to four dialing strings in the modem’s  
nonvolatile memory for later dialing. The format for the command is  
&Zn=“stored number” where n is the location 0-3 to which the number  
should be written. The dial string may contain up to 34 characters. The  
ATDS=n command dials using the string stored in location n.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0, 1, 2, 3  
ERROR Otherwise  
\Nn Error control mode selection  
This command determines the type of error control used by the modem  
when sending or receiving data.  
\N0  
\N1  
\N2  
Buffer mode. No error control.  
Direct mode.  
MNP or disconnect mode. The modem attempts to connect  
using MNP2-4 error control procedures. If this fails, the  
modem disconnects.  
This is also known as MNP reliable mode.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-8  
AT Commands  
\N3  
\N4  
V.42, MNP, or buffered (default).  
The modem attempts to connect in V.42 error control mode.  
If this fails, it attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, it  
connects in buffer mode and continues operation. This is  
also known as V.42/MNP auto reliable mode (same as &Q5).  
V.42 or disconnect. The modem attempts to connect in V.42  
error control mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects.  
\N5  
\N7  
V.42. MNP or buffered (same as \N3).  
V.42. MNP or buffered (same as \N3).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3,4,5,7  
ERROROtherwise  
\Qn Local flow control selection  
\Q0  
\Q1  
\Q3  
Disable flow control.  
XON/XOFF software flow control.  
CTS/RTS to DTE (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1,3  
ERROROtherwise  
\Vn Protocol result code  
\V0  
\V1  
Disable protocol result code appended to DCE speed.  
Enable protocol result code appended to DCE speed  
(default).  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
%B View numbers in blacklist  
If blacklisting is in effect, this command displays the numbers for which the  
last call attempted in the past two hours failed. The ERROR result code  
appears in regions that do not require blacklisting.  
%Cn Data compression control  
This command determines the operation of V.42bis and MNP class 5 data  
compression. On-line changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs  
first.  
%C0 V.42bis/MNP 5 disabled. No data compression.  
%C3 V.42bis/MNP 5 enabled. Data compression enabled  
(default).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,3  
ERROROtherwise  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-9  
Appendix D  
S-registers  
S-registers contain the settings that determine how a number of functions  
of the internal modem operate. For example, how many times to let the  
telephone ring before the modem answers and how long to wait before it  
hangs up if a connection fails. You can also customize certain AT  
commands such as the escape sequence and command line termination.  
The contents of the registers are changed automatically when you modify  
corresponding settings in your communication software. If you choose,  
however, you can display and edit the contents of the registers manually  
when the modem is in command mode. If the value is out of the acceptable  
range, then an error is generated.  
This chapter describes the settings for each S-register.  
S-register values  
The format for displaying the value of an S-register is:  
ATSn?  
where n is the register number. After you type in the register press ENTER.  
The format for modifying the value of an S-register is:  
ATSn=r  
where n is the register number, and r is the new register value. After you  
type in the register and its new value press ENTER.  
Some registers vary from one country/region to another.  
S0  
Auto answer ring number  
This register determines the number of rings the modem will count  
before automatically answering a call. Enter 0 (zero) if you do not  
want the modem to automatically answer at all. When disabled,  
the modem can only answer with an ATA command.  
User’s Manual  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
S-registers  
Range:0-255  
Default:0  
Units:rings  
S1  
S2  
Ring counter  
This register is read only. The value of S1 is incremented with each  
ring. If no ring occurs over a six-second interval, this register is  
cleared.  
Range:0-225  
Default:0  
Units:rings  
AT escape character (user defined)  
This register determines the ASCII values used for an escape  
sequence. The default is the + character. The escape sequence  
allows the modem to exit data mode and enter command mode  
when on-line. Values greater than 127 disable the escape  
sequence.  
Range:0-255, ASCII decimal  
Default:43  
Units:ASCII  
S3  
S4  
Command line termination character (user defined)  
This register determines the ASCII values as the carriage return  
character. This character is used to end command lines and result  
codes.  
Range:0-127, ASCII decimal  
Default:13 (carriage return)  
Units:ASCII  
Response formatting character (user defined)  
This register determines the ASCII value used as the line feed  
character. The modem uses a line feed character in command  
mode when it responds to the computer.  
Range:0-127, ASCII decimal  
Default:10 (line feed)  
Units:ASCII  
User’s Manual  
D-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S-registers  
S5  
S6  
S7  
Command line editing character (user defined)  
This register sets the character recognized as a backspace and  
pertains to asynchronous only. The modem will not recognize the  
backspace character if it is set to a value that is greater than 32  
ASCII. This character can be used to edit a command line. When  
the echo command is enabled, the modem echoes back to the  
local DTE the backspace character, an ASCII space character, and  
a second backspace character. This means a total of three  
characters are transmitted each time the modem processes the  
backspace character.  
Range:0-127, ASCII decimal  
Default:8 (backspace)  
Units:ASCII  
Wait before dialing  
This register sets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem  
must wait (pause) after going off-hook before dialing the first digit  
of the telephone number. The modem always pauses for a  
minimum of two seconds, even if the value of S6 is less that two  
seconds. The wait for dial tone call progress feature (W dial  
modifier in the dial string) will override the value in register S6.  
This operation, however, may be affected by some ATX options  
according to country/region restrictions. In some countries/regions,  
S6 will set dial tone detect time.  
Range:3-255  
Default:3  
Units:seconds  
Connection completion time-out  
This register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must wait  
before hanging up because carrier is not detected. The timer is  
started when the modem finishes dialing (originate), or goes off-  
hook (answer). In originate mode, the timer is reset upon detection  
of an answer tone if allowed by county restriction. The timer also  
specifies the wait for silence time for the @ dial modifier in  
seconds. S7 is not associated with the W dial modifier.  
Range:1-255  
Default:50  
Units:seconds  
User’s Manual  
D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S-registers  
S8  
Comma pause time  
This register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must  
pause when it encounters a comma (,) in the dial command string.  
In some countries/regions, S8 will set both wait before dialing and  
comma pause time.  
Range:0-255  
Default:2  
Units:seconds  
S11 DTMF dialing speed  
This register determines the dialing speed which is prefixed for  
each country/region.  
Range:50-255  
Default:95  
Units:.001 seconds  
S12 Escape guard time  
This register sets the value (in 20 millisecond increments) for the  
required pause after the escape sequence.  
Range:0-255  
Default:50  
Units:.02 seconds  
S37 Dial line rate  
S37 = 0 (default)  
S37 = 1  
maximum modem speed  
reserved  
S37 = 2  
1200/75 bps  
300 bps  
S37 = 3  
S37 = 4  
reserved  
S37 = 5  
1200 bps  
S37 = 6  
2400 bps  
S37 = 7  
4800 bps  
S37 = 8  
7200 bps  
S37 = 9  
9600 bps  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-4  
S-registers  
S37 = 10  
S37 = 11  
S37 = 12  
S37 = 13  
S37 = 14  
S37 = 15  
S37 = 16  
S37 = 17  
S37 = 18  
S37 = 19  
12000 bps  
14400 bps  
16800 bps  
19200 bps  
21600 bps  
24000 bps  
26400 bps  
28800 bps  
31200 bps  
33600 bps  
AT command set result codes  
The following table shows the result codes.  
The result code summary  
Result Code  
OK  
Numeric  
Description  
0
1
2
Command executed  
CONNECT  
RING  
Modem connected to line  
A ring signal has been  
detected  
NO CARRIER  
3
Modem lost carrier signal, or  
does not detect carrier  
signal, or does not detect  
answer tone  
ERROR  
4
5
Invalid command  
1
CONNECT 1200 EC*  
NO DIAL TONE  
BUSY  
Connection at 1200 bps  
No dial tone detected  
Busy signal detected  
No quiet answer  
6
7
NO ANSWER  
CONNECT 2400 EC*  
8
1
10  
Connection at 2400 bps  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-5  
 
S-registers  
1
1
CONNECT 4800 EC*  
CONNECT 9600 EC*  
11  
12  
13  
14  
24  
25  
86  
40  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
88  
Connection at 4800 bps  
Connection at 9600 bps  
Connection at 14400 bps  
Connection at 19200 bps  
Connection at 7200 bps  
Connection at 12000 bps  
Connection at 16800 bps  
Connection at 300 bps  
Connection at 21600 bps  
Connection at 24000 bps  
Connection at 26400 bps  
Connection at 28800 bps  
Connection at 31200 bps  
Connection at 33600 bps  
1
1
CONNECT 14400 EC*  
CONNECT 19200 EC*  
1
CONNECT 7200 EC*  
1
1
CONNECT 12000 EC*  
CONNECT 16800 EC*  
1
CONNECT 300 EC*  
1
1
1
1
1
1
CONNECT 21600 EC*  
CONNECT 24000 EC*  
CONNECT 26400 EC*  
CONNECT 28800 EC*  
CONNECT 31200 EC*  
CONNECT 33600 EC*  
2
DELAYED*  
Delay is in effect for the  
dialed number  
2
BLACKLISTED*  
89  
90  
Dialed number is blacklisted  
Blacklist is full  
2
BLACKLIST FULL*  
*1: EC only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option  
is enabled. EC is replaced by one of the following symbols, depending  
upon the error control method used:  
V.42bis - V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression.  
V.42 - V.42 error control only.  
MNP 5 - MNP class 4 error control and MNP class 5 data  
compression.  
MNP 4 - MNP class 4 error control only.  
NoEC - No error control protocol.  
*2: In some countries/regions, these result codes may not appear.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-6  
Appendix E  
V.90  
The TOSHIBA internal modem uses V.90 technology. The modem is  
capable of downstream speeds of 56kbps (kilobits per second) when  
connected to an Internet service provider that supports V.90. As with any  
modem, the actual throughput (speed of data transfer) depends on analog  
telephone line conditions, which can vary considerably. Therefore, many  
users will experience throughput in the range of 28-50kbps under normal  
telephone line conditions. Upstream data flows at the V.34 rate.  
V.90 rates can be achieved only when one V.90-capable host modem is  
connected to another. The TOSHIBA Internal modem will select  
automatically V.34 if the remote modem lacks V.90 capability or if a  
combination of network and/or phone line conditions prevent V.90  
connection.  
V.90 mode  
Function  
Data V.90  
Transmission speed  
From 56kbps (maximum) to 28kbps  
(minimum)  
Reception only  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-1  
       
V.90  
Table E-1 Result codes for a V.90 connection  
No.  
70  
Result code  
Description  
CONNECT 32000 EC*  
CONNECT 36000 EC*  
CONNECT 40000 EC*  
CONNECT 44000 EC*  
CONNECT 48000 EC*  
CONNECT 52000 EC*  
CONNECT 56000 EC*  
CONNECT 28000 EC*  
CONNECT 29333 EC*  
CONNECT 30666 EC*  
CONNECT 33333 EC*  
CONNECT 34666 EC*  
CONNECT 37333 EC*  
CONNECT 38666 EC*  
CONNECT 41333 EC*  
CONNECT 42666 EC*  
CONNECT 45333 EC*  
CONNECT 46666 EC*  
CONNECT 49333 EC*  
CONNECT 50666 EC*  
CONNECT 53333 EC*  
CONNECT 54666 EC*  
Connection at 32000 bps  
Connection at 36000 bps  
Connection at 40000 bps  
Connection at 44000 bps  
Connection at 48000 bps  
Connection at 52000 bps  
Connection at 56000 bps  
Connection at 28000 bps  
Connection at 29333 bps  
Connection at 30666 bps  
Connection at 33333 bps  
Connection at 34666 bps  
Connection at 37333 bps  
Connection at 38666 bps  
Connection at 41333 bps  
Connection at 42666 bps  
Connection at 45333 bps  
Connection at 46666 bps  
Connection at 49333 bps  
Connection at 50666 bps  
Connection at 53333 bps  
Connection at 54666 bps  
72  
74  
76  
78  
80  
82  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-2  
V.90  
*EC stands for the Error Control method, which appears only when the  
extended result codes configuration option is enabled. EC is replaced by  
one of the following symbols, depending on the error control method  
used.  
V42bis  
V42  
V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression  
V.42 error control only  
NoEC  
No error control protocol  
AT Command  
-V90=*  
V.90 Dial Line Rate  
-V90 sets the maximum V.90 downstream that the  
modem attempts to connect.  
-V90=0  
-V90=1  
V.90 disabled  
V.90 enabled: automatic speed selection - maximum  
modem speed (default)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-3  
 
Appendix F  
Wireless LAN  
This appendix is intended to help you get your Wireless LAN network up  
and running, with a minimum of parameters.  
Card Specifications  
Form Factor  
Compatibility  
PCI Express Mini Card  
■ IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANS  
■ Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) certified by the Wi-Fi  
Alliance. The ‘Wi-Fi CERTIFIED’ logo is a  
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
■ Microsoft Windows® Networking  
Network Operating  
System  
■ CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with  
Media Access  
Protocol  
Acknowledgment (ACK)  
User’s Manual  
F-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Wireless LAN  
Radio Characteristics  
Radio Characteristics of Wireless LAN Cards may vary according to:  
■ Country/region where the product was purchased  
■ Type of product  
Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations.  
Although Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed  
for operation in the license-free 2.4GHz and 5GHz band, local radio  
regulations may impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless  
communication equipment.  
Refer to the sheet “Information to the User” for regulatory information that  
may apply in your country/region.  
■ Band 5GHz (5150-5850 MHz) (Revision A, N  
R-F Frequency  
Draft Ver. 1.0)  
■ Band 2.4GHz (2400-2483.5 MHz) (Revision  
B, G, N Draft Ver. 1.0)  
The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the  
wireless communication. Communications at lower transmit range may  
travel larger distances.  
■ The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas  
are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials.  
■ Range is also impacted due to "obstacles" in the signal path of the radio  
that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal.  
Supported Frequency Sub-bands  
Subject to the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions, your  
Wireless LAN card may support a different set of 5 GHz/2.4 GHz channels.  
Consult your Authorized Wireless LAN or TOSHIBA Sales office for  
information about the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions.  
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision B, G and N Draft Ver.  
1.0)  
Frequency Range  
2400-2483.5 MHz  
Channel ID  
1
2
3
4
2412  
2417  
2422  
2427  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-2  
   
Wireless LAN  
5
2432  
2437  
2442  
2447  
2452  
2457*  
2462  
2467*  
2472*  
6
7
8
9
1
10  
11  
12  
13  
2
2
*1 Factory-set default channels  
*2 Refer to the sheet Approved Countries/Regions for use for the  
countries/regions that in which these channels can be used. When  
installing Wireless LAN cards, the channel configuration is managed as  
follows:  
■ For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the  
Wireless LAN card will automatically start operation at the channel  
identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between  
different access points the station can dynamically switch to another  
channel if required.  
■ For Wireless LAN cards installed in wireless clients that operating in a  
peer-to-peer mode, the card will use the default channel 10.  
■ In a Wireless LAN Access Point, the Wireless LAN card will use the  
factory-set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN  
Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the  
Wireless LAN Access Point device.  
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision A and N Draft Ver. 1.0)  
Frequency Range  
5150-5850 MHz  
Channel ID  
36  
40  
44  
48  
5180  
5200  
5220  
5240  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-3  
Wireless LAN  
52  
5260  
5280  
5300  
5320  
5500  
5520  
5540  
5560  
5580  
5600  
5620  
5640  
5660  
5680  
5700  
5745  
5765  
5785  
5805  
5825  
56  
60  
64  
100  
104  
108  
112  
116  
120  
124  
128  
132  
136  
140  
149  
153  
157  
161  
165  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-4  
Appendix G  
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager  
If you are installing the operating system on a computer system which is  
®
configured for AHCI mode, you must pre-install the Intel Matrix Storage  
Manager driver using the F6 installation method described in the Manually  
Setting up Windows (Windows Vista™) or Manually Setting up Windows  
Manually (Windows XP) sections.  
This model does not support RAID functionality.  
If you have already installed the operating system on a system configured  
for AHCI mode, double-click iata_cd.exe and respond to each of the  
®
prompts in order to install the Intel Matrix Storage Manager.  
All installed files (readme.txt, help, etc.) are copied to the following path by  
default:  
<bootdrive>\Program Files\Intel\Intel Matrix Storage  
Manager  
Manually Setting up Windows (Windows Vista™)  
Use the following procedures to manually set up your Windows operating  
system.  
Before Setting up Windows  
®
Before setting up Windows, create an Intel Matrix Storage Manager Disk.  
Creating an Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Disk  
1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert a floppy diskette.  
2. Copy all of the files located in the "C:\TOSAPINS\Intel Matrix Storage  
Manager\Inf setup" folder to the floppy diskette.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-1  
     
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager  
Windows Setup Procedure  
1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert the above disk.  
2. Insert the Windows Setup DVD into the optical disc drive and boot the  
computer from the DVD. The Windows Setup program will start.  
3. Carry out the setup process by following the instructions displayed on  
the setup screen. When the message "Which type of  
installation do you want?" appears, select Custom  
(advanced).  
4. When the message "Where do you want to install Windows?"  
appears, click Load Driver.  
5. Click the Browse button and then select Floppy Disk Drive(A:).  
6. Select "Intel(R) 82801HEM/HBM SATA AHCI Controller" from  
the list that appear, and click Next.  
7. When the message "Where do you want to install Windows?"  
appears again, select the destination drive and then click Next.  
8. Continue to follow the onscreen instructions to finish installing windows.  
■ Please use only hard disk drives that the computer supports. The  
system may not function correctly if unsupported hard disk drives are  
used.  
■ Errors may occur in the following situations:  
■ When using applications which directly access the hardware and  
read from or write to the hard disk drive.  
■ When using another operating system, such as Linux, to run  
application that read from or right to the hard disk drive.  
Manually Setting up Windows Manually (Windows XP)  
Use the following procedures to manually set up your Windows operating  
system.  
Before Setting up Windows  
®
Before setting up Windows, create an Intel Matrix Storage Manager Disk.  
Creating the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Disk  
1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert a floppy diskette.  
2. Copy all of the files located in the "C:\TOSAPINS\Intel Matrix  
Storage Manager\Inf setup" folder to the floppy diskette.  
Windows Setup Procedure  
1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert the disk created in the  
previous step.  
2. Insert the Windows Setup CD-ROM into the optical disc drive and boot  
the computer up from the CD. The Windows Setup program will start.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-2  
 
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager  
3. When the message "Press F6 if you need to install a  
third party SCSI or RAID driver" appears on the screen,  
press the F6 key.  
4. When the message "Setup will load support for the  
following mass storage device(s):" appears on the screen,  
press the S key.  
5. Select "Intel(R) 82801HEM/HBM SATA AHCI Controller  
(Mobile ICH8M-E/M)" and press the Enter key.  
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to continue setting up windows.  
■ Please use only hard disk drives that the computer supports. The  
system may not function correctly if unsupported hard disk drives are  
used.  
■ Errors may occur in the following situations:  
■ When using applications which directly access the hardware and  
read from or write to the hard disk drive.  
■ When using another operating system, such as Linux, to run  
application that read from or right to the hard disk drive.  
How to install Intel® Matrix Storage Manager on Windows XP  
or Windows Vista™:  
To install this software on Windows XP or Windows Vista™ logon with an  
account that has administrator user privileges.  
®
1. Double-click the Intel Matrix Storage Manager setup file  
("iata_cd.exe") located in the  
C:\TOSAPINS\Intel Matrix Storage Managerfolder.  
2. Follow the onscreen installation instructions.  
3. Restart the system.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-3  
 
Appendix H  
Bluetooth wireless technology  
Interoperability  
Bluetooth® Adaptors from TOSHIBA are designed to be interoperable with  
any product with Bluetooth wireless technology that is based on Frequency  
Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) radio technology, and is compliant to:  
■ Bluetooth Specification Ver.2.0+EDR, as defined and approved by The  
Bluetooth Special Interest Group.  
■ Logo certification with Bluetooth wireless technology as defined by The  
Bluetooth Special interest Group.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H-1  
   
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
■ Bluetooth wireless technology is a new innovative technology, and  
TOSHIBA has not confirmed compatibility of its Bluetooth® products  
with all computers and/or equipment using Bluetooth wireless  
technology other than TOSHIBA portable computers.  
Always use Bluetooth® Adaptors from TOSHIBA in order to enable  
wireless networks over two or more (up to a total of seven) TOSHIBA  
portable computers using these cards. Please contact TOSHIBA PC  
product support on Web site  
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe  
or  
http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more  
information.  
■ When you use Bluetooth® Adaptors from TOSHIBA close to 2.4 GHz  
Wireless LAN devices, Bluetooth transmissions might slow down or  
cause errors. If you detect certain interference while you use  
Bluetooth® Adaptors from TOSHIBA, always change the frequency,  
move your computer to the area outside of the interference range of 2.4  
GHz Wireless LAN devices (40 meters/43.74 yards or more) or stop  
transmitting from your computer. Please contact TOSHIBA PC product  
support on Web site  
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe  
or  
http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more  
information.  
■ Bluetooth® and Wireless LAN devices operate within the same radio  
frequency range and may interfere with one another. If you use  
Bluetooth® and Wireless LAN devices simultaneously, you may  
occasionally experience a less than optimal network performance or  
even lose your network connection.  
If you should experience any such problem, immediately turn off either  
one of your Bluetooth® or Wireless LAN.  
Please contact TOSHIBA PC product support on web site  
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe  
or  
http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more  
information.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H-2  
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Bluetooth wireless technology and your Health  
The products with Bluetooth wireless technology, like other radio devices,  
emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted  
by devices with Bluetooth wireless technology however is far much less  
than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for  
example mobile phones.  
Because products with Bluetooth wireless technology operate within the  
guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and  
recommendations, TOSHIBA believes Bluetooth wireless technology is  
safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect  
the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of  
panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret  
the extensive research literature.  
In some situations or environments, the use of Bluetooth wireless  
technology may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible  
representatives of the organization. These situations may for example  
include:  
■ Using the equipment with Bluetooth wireless technology on board of  
airplanes, or  
■ In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices  
or services is perceived or identified as harmful.  
If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices  
in a specific organization or environment (e.g. airports), you are  
encouraged to ask for authorization to use the device with Bluetooth  
wireless technology prior to turning on the equipment.  
Regulatory statements  
General  
This product complies with any mandatory product specification in any  
country/region where the product is sold. In addition, the product complies  
with the following.  
European Union (EU) and EFTA  
This equipment complies with the R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC and has  
been provided with the CE mark accordingly.  
Canada - Industry Canada (IC)  
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not  
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H-3  
   
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
L ‘ utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions  
suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’ utilisateur du  
dispositif doit étre prét à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu,  
même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement  
du dispositif.  
The term “IC” before the equipment certification number only signifies that  
the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.  
USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna  
■ Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.  
■ Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which  
the receiver is connected.  
■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
TOSHIBA is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused  
by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this Bluetooth®  
Adaptor from TOSHIBA, or the substitution or attachment of connecting  
cables and equipment other than specified by TOSHIBA.  
The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification,  
substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H-4  
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation  
The radiated output power of the Bluetooth® Adaptor from TOSHIBA is far  
below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the  
Bluetooth® Adaptor from TOSHIBA shall be used in such a manner that the  
potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. The  
antenna(s) used in this device are located at the upper edge of the LCD  
screen, and this device has been tested as portable device as defined in  
Section 2.1093 of FCC rules when the LCD screen is rotated 180 degree  
and covered the keyboard area. In addition, Bluetooth has been tested with  
Wireless LAN transceiver for co-location requirements. This device and its  
antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any  
other antenna or transmitter. The installer of this radio equipment must  
ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF  
field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult  
Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website www.hc-  
sc.gc.ca/rpb.  
Taiwan  
Article 12  
Without permission granted by the DGT or NCC, any  
company, enterprise, or user is not allowed to change  
frequency, enhance transmitting power or alter original  
characteristic as well as performance to an approved low  
power radio-frequency devices.  
Article 14  
The low power radio-frequency devices shall not influence  
aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found,  
the user shall cease operating immediately until no  
interference is achieved.  
The said legal communications means radio communications  
is operated in compliance with the Telecommunications Act.  
The low power radio-frequency devices must be susceptible  
with the interference from legal communications or ISM radio  
wave radiated devices.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H-5  
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
®
Using Bluetooth Adaptor from TOSHIBA equipment in Japan  
In Japan, the frequency bandwidth of 2,400 - 2,483.5 MHz for second  
generation low-power data communication systems such as this equipment  
overlaps that of mobile object identification systems (premises radio station  
and specified low-power radio station).  
1. Sticker  
Please put the following sticker on computer incorporating this product.  
The frequency bandwidth of this equipment may operate  
within the same range as industrial devices, scientific  
devices, medical devices, microwave ovens, licensed radio  
stations and non-licensed specified low-power radio stations  
for mobile object identification systems (RFID) used in  
factory production lines (Other Radio Stations).  
1. Before using this equipment, ensure that it does not  
interfere with any of the equipment listed above.  
2. If this equipment causes RF interference to other radio  
stations, promptly change the frequency being used,  
change the location of use, or turn off the source of  
emissions.  
3. Contact TOSHIBA Direct PC if you have problems with  
interference caused by this product to Other Radio Stations.  
2. Indication  
The indication shown below appears on this equipment.  
(1) 2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4 GHz.  
(2) FH : This equipment uses FH-SS modulation.  
(3) 1: The interference range of this equipment is less than 10 m.  
(4)  
This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from  
2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz.  
It is impossible to avoid the band of mobile object  
identification systems.  
3. TOSHIBA Direct PC  
Monday - Friday: 10:00-17:00  
Toll Free Tel  
Direct Dial  
FAX  
: 0120-15-1048  
: 03-3457-4850  
: 03-3457-4868  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H-6  
 
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Device Authorization  
This device obtains the Technical Conditions Compliance Approval, and it  
belongs to the device class of radio equipment of low-power data  
communication system radio station stipulated in the Telecommunications  
Business Law.  
The Name of the radio equipment: EYXF3CS  
JAPAN APPROVALS INSTITUTE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS  
EQUIPMENT  
Approval Number: D05-0074001  
The following restrictions apply:  
Do not disassemble or modify the device.  
Do not install the embedded wireless module into other device.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H-7  
Appendix I  
AC Power Cord and Connectors  
The power cord’s AC input plug must be compatible with the various  
international AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for  
the country/region in which it is used. All cords must meet the following  
specifications:  
Length:  
Minimum 1.7 meters  
2
Wire size:  
Minimum 0.75 mm  
Current rating:  
Voltage rating:  
Minimum 2.5 amperes  
125 or 250 VAC  
(depending on country/region’s power standards)  
Certification agencies  
U.S. and Canada: UL listed and CSA certified  
No. 18 AWG, Type SVT or SPT-2  
Australia:  
AS  
Japan:  
DENANHO  
Europe:  
Austria:  
OVE  
Italy:  
IMQ  
Belgium:  
Denmark:  
CEBEC  
DEMKO  
The Netherlands:  
Norway:  
KEMA  
NEMKO  
User’s Manual  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AC Power Cord and Connectors  
Sweden: SEMKO  
Finland:  
France:  
FIMKO  
LCIE  
Switzerland:  
SEV  
BSI  
Germany:  
VDE  
United Kingdom:  
In Europe, two conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VVH2-F or  
H03VVH2-F and for three conductors power cord must be VDE type,  
H05VV-F.  
For the United States and Canada, two pin plug configuration must be a 2-  
15P (250V) or 1-15P (125V) and three pin plug configuration must be 6-  
15P (250V) or 5-15P (125V) as designated in the U.S. National Electrical  
code handbook and the Canadian Electrical Code Part II.  
The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U.S.A. and Canada,  
the United Kingdom, Australia and Europe.  
United Kingdom  
USA  
UL approved  
BS approved  
Australia  
Europe  
Approved by the  
AS approved  
appropriate agency  
Canada  
CSA approved  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I-2  
Appendix J  
TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer  
This feature allows you to set up a timer-activated BIOS password that will  
prevent unauthorised system access in the event of theft.  
When the time limit is exceeded, you are required to provide the Password  
or fingerprint authentication for the BIOS and Hard Disk Drive to gain  
access to the system.  
To set permissions and limits for the TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer  
please use the TOSHIBA Password Utility.  
The settings can only be activated or modified by a user with supervisor  
authority. If the supervisor password is not set, click on the Set button in  
Supervisor Password from the supervisor tab in TOSHIBA Password  
Utility and set the password on the dialog screen that appears.  
Then, click on the Set button in TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer.  
Take the following action if the set limit is exceeded.  
■ If the Supervisor Password is registered but the User Password is not,  
enter the Supervisor Password to boot up the computer.  
■ If both the Supervisor Password and the User Password are registered,  
enter either the Supervisor Password, the User Password or the  
fingerprint authentication to boot up the computer.  
■ The limit counts the number of days from the last time Windows is  
logged on till the next time the computer is booted up. The range can  
be set from 1 to 28 days.  
■ Authentication is required if the computer’s clock is significantly  
modified.  
■ If the Supervisor Password is deleted, this function becomes disabled.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J-1  
   
Appendix K  
Legal Footnotes  
This chapter states the Legal Footnotes information applicable to TOSHIBA  
computers. In the text in this manual, *XX is used to show which Legal  
Footnotes description is related to TOSHIBA computers.  
Description(s) related to this computer are marked with a blue *XX in this  
manual. Clicking on *XX will display the related description.  
Non-applicable Icons*1  
Certain computer chassis are designed to accommodate all possible  
configurations for an entire product series. Therefore, please be aware that  
your selected model may not have all the features and specifications  
corresponding to all of the icons or switches shown on the computer  
chassis.  
CPU*2  
Central Processing Unit ("CPU") Performance Legal Footnotes.  
CPU performance in your computer product may vary from specifications  
under the following conditions:  
■ use of certain external peripheral products  
■ use of battery power instead of AC power  
■ use of certain multimedia, computer generated graphics or video  
applications  
■ use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections  
■ use of complex modeling software, such as high end computer aided  
design applications  
■ use of several applications or functionalities simultaneously  
■ use of computer in areas with low air pressure (high altitude >1,000  
meters or >3,280 feet above sea level)  
User’s Manual  
K-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Legal Footnotes  
■ use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5°C to 30°C (41°F  
to 86°F) or >25°C (77°F) at high altitude (all temperature references are  
approximate and may vary depending on the specific computer model -  
please refer to your computer documentation or visit the Toshiba  
website at www.pcsupport.toshiba.com for details).  
CPU performance may also vary from specifications due to design  
configuration.  
Under some conditions, your computer product may automatically shut-  
down. This is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost  
data or damage to the product when used outside recommended  
conditions. To avoid risk of lost data, always make back-up copies of data  
by periodically storing it on an external storage medium. For optimum  
performance, use your computer product only under recommended  
conditions. Read additional restrictions in your product documentation.  
Contact Toshiba technical service and support, refer to TOSHIBA support  
section in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for more information.  
64-Bit Computing  
64-bit processors are designed to take advantage of 32 and 64 bit  
computing.  
64-bit computing requires that the following hardware and software  
requirements are met:  
■ 64-bit Operating System  
■ 64-bit CPU, Chipset and BIOS (Basic Input/Output System)  
■ 64-bit Device drivers  
■ 64-bit applications  
Certain device drivers and/or applications may not be compatible with a 64-  
bit CPU and therefore may not function properly. A 32-bit version of the  
operating system is preinstalled on your computer unless explicitly stated  
that the operating system is 64-bit.  
Memory (Main System)*3  
Part of the main system memory may be used by the graphics system for  
graphics performance and therefore reduce the amount of main system  
memory available for other computing activities. The amount of main  
system memory allocated to support graphics may vary depending on the  
graphics system, applications utilized, system memory size and other  
factors. For computer's configured with 4 GB of system memory, the full  
system memory space for computing activities will be considerably less and  
will vary by model and system configuration.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K-2  
   
Legal Footnotes  
Battery Life*4  
Battery life may vary considerably depending on product model,  
configuration, applications, power management settings and features  
utilized, as well as the natural performance variations produced by the  
design of individual components. Published battery life numbers are  
achieved on select models and configurations tested by Toshiba at the time  
of publication. Recharge time varies depending on usage. Battery may not  
charge while computer is consuming full power.  
After going through many charge and discharge cycles, the battery will lose  
its ability to perform at maximum capacity and will need to be replaced.  
This is a normal phenomenon for all batteries. To purchase a new battery  
pack, see the accessories information that is shipped with your computer.  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*5  
1 Gigabyte (GB) means 109 = 1,000,000,000 bytes using powers of 10. The  
computer operating system, however, reports storage capacity using  
powers of 2 for the definition of 1 GB = 230 = 1,073,741,824 bytes, and  
therefore shows less storage capacity. Available storage capacity will also  
be less if the product includes one or more pre-installed operating systems,  
such as Microsoft Windows and/or pre-installed software applications, or  
media content. Actual formatted capacity may vary.  
LCD*6  
Over a period of time, and depending on the usage of the computer, the  
brightness of the LCD screen will deteriorate. This is an intrinsic  
characteristic of LCD technology.  
Maximum brightness is only available when operating in AC power mode.  
The screen will dim when the computer is operated on battery power and  
you may not be able to increase the brightness of the screen.  
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*7  
Graphics processor unit ("GPU") performance may vary depending on  
product model, design configuration, applications, power management  
settings and features utilized. GPU performance is only optimized when  
operating in AC power mode and may decrease considerably when  
operating in battery power mode.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K-3  
               
Legal Footnotes  
Wireless LAN*8  
The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which  
wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding  
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and  
configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations. The  
actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum  
speed.  
The Intel® Next-Gen Wireless-N adaptor is based on a draft release version  
of the IEEE 802.11n specification, also known as "Draft-N", which may not  
be compatible with, or support all features (e.g., security) of, certain Wi-Fi  
equipment.  
Copy Protection*9  
Applicable copy protection standards included in certain media may  
prevent or limit recording or viewing of the media.  
Images*10  
All images are simulated for purposes of illustration.  
User’s Manual  
K-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
The terms in this glossary cover topics related to this manual. Alternate  
naming is included for reference.  
Abbreviations  
AC: alternating current  
AGP: accelerated graphics port  
ANSI: American National Standards Institute  
APM: advanced power manager  
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange  
BIOS: basic input output system  
CD-ROM: Compact Disc-Read Only Memory  
CD-RW: Compact Disc-ReWritable  
CMOS: complementary metal-oxide semiconductor  
CPU: central processing unit  
CRT: cathode ray tube  
DC: direct current  
DDC: display data channel  
DMA: direct memory access  
DOS: disk operating system  
DVD: digital versatile disc  
DVD-R: Digital Versatile Disc-Recordable  
DVD-RAM: Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory  
DVD-R (Dual Layer): Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Dual Layer  
DVD-ROM: Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory  
DVD-RW: Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable  
DVD+R (Double Layer): Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Double Layer  
ECP: extended capabilities port  
FDD: floppy diskette drive  
FIR: fast infrared  
HDD: hard disk drive  
IDE: integrated drive electronics  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-1  
 
Glossary  
I/O: input/output  
IRQ: interrupt request  
KB: kilobyte  
LCD: liquid crystal display  
LED: light emitting diode  
LSI: large scale integration  
MB: megabyte  
MS-DOS: Microsoft Disk Operating System  
OCR: optical character recognition (reader)  
PCB: printed circuit board  
PCI: peripheral component interconnect  
RAM: random access memory  
RGB: red, green, and blue  
ROM: read only memory  
RTC: real time clock  
SCSI: small computer system interface  
SIO: serial input/output  
TFT: thin-film transistor  
UART: universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter  
USB: Universal Serial Bus  
UXGA: ultra extended graphics array  
VGA: video graphics array  
VRT: voltage reduction technology  
WXGA: wide extended graphics array  
WXGA+: wide extended graphics array plus  
XGA: extended graphics array  
A
AccuPoint: A pointing device integrated into the TOSHIBA computer  
keyboard.  
adaptor: A device that provides an interface between two dissimilar  
electronic devices. For example, the AC adaptor modifies the power  
from a wall outlet for use by the computer. This term also refers to  
the add-in circuit cards that control external devices, such as video  
monitors and magnetic tape devices.  
allocate: To assign a space or function for a specific task.  
alphanumeric: Keyboard characters including letters, numbers and other  
symbols, such as punctuation marks or mathematical symbols.  
alternating current (AC): Electric current that reverses its direction of flow  
at regular intervals.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-2  
Glossary  
analog signal: A signal whose characteristics such as amplitude and  
frequency vary in proportion to (are an analog of) the value to be  
transmitted. Voice communications are analog signals.  
ANSI: American National Standards Institute. An organization established  
to adopt and define standards for a variety of technical disciplines.  
For example, ANSI defined the ASCII standard and other  
information processing requirements.  
antistatic: A material used to prevent the buildup of static electricity.  
application: A group of programs that together are used for a specific task  
such as accounting, financial planning, spreadsheets, word  
processing and games.  
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII code  
is a set of 256 binary codes that represent the most commonly used  
letters, numbers, and symbols.  
async: Short for asynchronous.  
asynchronous: Lacking regular time relationship. As applied to computer  
communications, asynchronous refers to the method of transmitting  
data that does not require a steady stream of bits to be transmitted  
at regular time intervals.  
B
backup: A duplicate copy of files kept as a spare in case the original is  
destroyed.  
batch file: A file that can be executed from the system prompt containing a  
sequence of operating system commands or executable files.  
binary: The base two number system composed of zeros and ones (off or  
on), used by most digital computers. The right-most digit of a binary  
number has a value of 1, the next a value of 2, then 4, 8, 16, and so  
on. For example, the binary number 101 has a value of 5. See also  
ASCII.  
BIOS: Basic Input Output System. The firmware that controls data flow  
within the computer. See also firmware.  
bit: Derived from "binary digit," the basic unit of information used by the  
computer. It is either zero or one. Eight bits is one byte. See also  
byte.  
board: A circuit board. An internal card containing electronic components,  
called chips, which perform a specific function or increase the  
capabilities of the system.  
boot: Short for bootstrap. A program that starts or restarts the computer.  
The program reads instructions from a storage device into the  
computer’s memory.  
bps: Bits per second. Typically used to describe the data transmission  
speed of a modem.  
buffer: The portion of the computer’s memory where data is temporarily  
stored. Buffers often compensate for differences in the rate of flow  
from one device to another.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-3  
Glossary  
bus: An interface for transmission of signals, data or electric power.  
byte: The representation of a single character. A sequence of eight bits  
treated as a single unit; also the smallest addressable unit within the  
system.  
C
cache memory: High speed memory which stores data that increases  
processor speed and data transfer rate. When the CPU reads data  
from main memory, it stores a copy of this data in cache memory.  
The next time the CPU needs that same data, it looks for it in the  
cache memory rather than the main memory, which saves time. The  
computer has two cache levels. Level one is incorporated into the  
processor and level two resides in external memory.  
capacity: The amount of data that can be stored on a magnetic storage  
device such as a floppy diskette or hard disk drive. It is usually  
described in terms of kilobytes (KB), where one KB = 1024 bytes,  
megabytes (MB), where one MB = 1024 KB and gigabytes (GB),  
where one GB = 1024 MB.  
card: Synonym for board. See board.  
CardBus: An industry standard bus for 32-bit PC Cards.  
CD-ROM: A Compact Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity disc that  
can be read from but not written to. The CD-ROM drive uses a laser,  
rather than magnetic heads, to read data from the disc.  
CD-R: A Compact Disc-Recordable disc can be written once and read  
many times. See also CD-ROM.  
CD-RW: A Compact Disc-ReWritable disc can be rewritten many times.  
See also CD-ROM.  
character: Any letter, number, punctuation mark, or symbol used by the  
computer. Also synonymous with byte.  
chassis: The frame containing the computer.  
chip: A small semiconductor containing computer logic and circuitry for  
processing, memory, input/output functions and controlling other  
chips.  
CMOS: Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. An electronic circuit  
fabricated on a silicon wafer that requires very little power.  
Integrated circuits implemented in CMOS technology can be tightly  
packaged and are highly reliable.  
cold start: Starting a computer that is currently off (turning on the power).  
COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4: The names assigned to the serial and  
communication ports.  
commands: Instructions you enter at the terminal keyboard that direct the  
actions of the computer or its peripheral devices.  
communications: The means by which a computer transmits and  
receives data to and from another computer or device. See parallel  
interface; serial interface.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-4  
Glossary  
compatibility: 1) The ability of one computer to accept and process data  
in the same manner as another computer without modifying the data  
or the media upon which it is being transferred.  
2) the ability of one device to connect to or communicate with  
another system or component.  
components: Elements or parts (of a system) which make up the whole  
(system).  
computer program: A set of instructions written for a computer that  
enable it to achieve a desired result.  
computer system: A combination of hardware, software, firmware, and  
peripheral components assembled to process data into useful  
information.  
configuration: The specific components in your system (such as the  
terminal, printer, and disk drives) and the settings that define how  
your system works. You use the HW Setup program to control your  
system configuration.  
control keys: A key or sequence of keys you enter from the keyboard to  
initiate a particular function within a program.  
controller: Built-in hardware and software that controls the functions of a  
specific internal or peripheral device (e.g. keyboard controller).  
co-processor: A circuit built into the processor that is dedicated to  
intensive math calculations.  
CPS: Characters Per Second. Typically used to indicate the transmission  
speed of a printer.  
CPU: Central Processing Unit. The portion of the computer that interprets  
and executes instructions.  
CRT: Cathode Ray Tube. A vacuum tube in which beams projected on a  
fluorescent screen-producing luminous spots. An example is the  
television set.  
cursor: A small, blinking rectangle or line that indicates the current  
position on the display screen.  
D
data: Information that is factual, measurable or statistical that a computer  
can process, store, or retrieve.  
data bits: A data communications parameter controlling the number of bits  
(binary digits) used to make up a byte. If data bits = 7 the computer  
can generate 128 unique characters. If data bits = 8 the computer  
can generate 256 unique characters.  
DC: Direct Current. Electric current that flows in one direction. This type of  
power is usually supplied by batteries.  
default: The parameter value automatically selected by the system when  
you or the program do not provide instructions. Also called a preset  
value.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-5  
Glossary  
delete: To remove data from a disk or other data storage device.  
Synonymous with erase.  
device driver: A program that controls communication between a specific  
peripheral device and the computer. The CONFIG.SYS file contains  
device drivers that MS-DOS loads when you turn the computer on.  
dialog box: A window that accepts user input to make system settings or  
record other information.  
disk drive: The device that randomly accesses information on a disk and  
copies it to the computer’s memory. It also writes data from memory  
to the disk. To accomplish these tasks, the unit physically rotates the  
disk at high speed past a read-write head.  
disk storage: Storing data on magnetic disk. Data is arranged on  
concentric tracks much like a phonograph record.  
display: A CRT, LCD, or other image producing device used to view  
computer output.  
documentation: The set of manuals and/or other instructions written for  
the users of a computer system or application. Computer system  
documentation typically includes procedural and tutorial information  
as well as system functions.  
DOS: Disk Operating System. See operating system.  
driver: A software program, generally part of the operating system, that  
controls a specific piece of hardware (frequently a peripheral device  
such as a printer or mouse).  
DVD-R (+R, -R): A Digital Versatile Disc-Recordable disk can be written  
once and read many times. The DVD-R drive uses a laser to read  
data from the disc.  
DVD-RAM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory is a high-  
capacity, high performance disc that lets you store large volumes of  
data. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.  
DVD-R (Dual Layer): A disc having two layers on one side with the DVD-R  
storage capacity about 1.8 times larger than before. The DVD-RW  
drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.  
DVD-ROM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity,  
high performance disc suitable for play back of video and other  
high-density files. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data  
from the disc.  
DVD-RW (+RW, -RW): A Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable disc can be  
rewritten many times.  
DVD+R (Double Layer): A disc having two layers on one side with the  
DVD+R storage capacity about 1.8 times larger than before. The  
DVD-RW drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-6  
Glossary  
E
echo: To send back a reflection of the transmitted data to the sending  
device. You can display the information on the screen, or output it to  
the printer, or both. When a computer receives back data it  
transmitted to a CRT (or other peripheral device) and then  
retransmits the data to printer, the printer is said to echo the CRT.  
erase: See delete.  
escape: 1) A code (ASCII code 27), signaling the computer that what  
follows are commands; used with peripheral devices such as  
printers and modems.  
2) A means of aborting the task currently in progress.  
escape guard time: A time before and after an escape code is sent to the  
modem which distinguishes between escapes that are part of the  
transmitted data, and escapes that are intended as a command to  
the modem.  
execute: To interpret and execute an instruction.  
Extended Capability Port: An industry standard that provides a data  
buffer, switchable forward and reverse data transmission, and run  
length encoding (RLE) support.  
F
fast infrared: An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial  
data transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps.  
file: A collection of related information; a file can contain data, programs,  
or both.  
fingerprint sensor: The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the  
unique characteristics in a fingerprint.  
firmware: A set of instructions built into the hardware which controls and  
directs a microprocessor’s activities.  
floppy diskette: A removable disk that stores magnetically encoded data.  
floppy diskette drive (FDD): An electromechanical device that reads and  
writes to floppy diskettes.  
Fn-esse: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you assign functions to hot keys.  
folder: An icon in Windows used to store documents or other folders.  
format: The process of readying a blank disk for its first use. Formatting  
establishes the structure of the disk that the operating system  
expects before it writes files or programs onto the disk.  
function keys: The keys labeled F1 through F12 that tell the computer to  
perform certain functions.  
G
gigabyte (GB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 megabytes. See also  
megabyte.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-7  
Glossary  
graphics: Drawings, pictures, or other images, such as charts or graphs,  
to present information.  
H
hard disk: A non-removable disk usually referred to as drive C. The  
factory installs this disk and only a trained engineer can remove it  
for servicing. Also called fixed disk.  
hard disk drive (HDD): An electromechanical device that reads and writes  
a hard disk. See also hard disk.  
hardware: The physical electronic and mechanical components of a  
computer system: typically, the computer itself, external disk drives,  
etc. See also software and firmware.  
hertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals one cycle per second.  
hexadecimal: The base 16 numbering system composed of the digits 0  
through 9 and the letters A, B, C, D, E, and F.  
host computer: The computer that controls, regulates, and transmits  
information to a device or another computer.  
hot key: The computer’s feature in which certain keys in combination with  
the extended function key, FN, can be used to set system  
parameters, such as speaker volume.  
HW Setup: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for various  
hardware components.  
I
icon: A small graphic image displayed on the screen or in the indicator  
panel. In Windows, an icon represents an object that the user can  
manipulate.  
i.LINK (IEEE1394): This port enables high-speed data transfer directly  
from external devices such as digital video cameras.  
input: The data or instructions you provide to a computer, communication  
device or other peripheral device from the keyboard or external or  
internal storage devices. The data sent (or output) by the sending  
computer is input for the receiving computer.  
instruction: Statements or commands that specify how to perform a  
particular task.  
interface: 1) Hardware and/or software components of a system used  
specifically to connect one system or device to another.  
2) To physically connect one system or device to another to  
exchange information.  
3) The point of contact between user, the computer, and the  
program, for example, the keyboard or a menu.  
interrupt request: A signal that gives a component access to the  
processor.  
I/O: Input/output. Refers to acceptance and transfer of data to and from a  
computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-8  
Glossary  
I/O devices: Equipment used to communicate with the computer and  
transfer data to and from it.  
J
jumper: A small clip or wire that allows you to change the hardware  
characteristics by electrically connecting two points of a circuit.  
K
K: Taken from the Greek word kilo, meaning 1000; often used as  
equivalent to 1024, or 2 raised to the 10th power. See also byte and  
kilobyte.  
KB: See kilobyte.  
keyboard: An input device containing switches that are activated by  
manually pressing marked keys. Each keystroke activates a switch  
that transmits a specific code to the computer. For each key, the  
transmitted code is, in turn, representative of the (ASCII) character  
marked on the key.  
kilobyte (KB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 bytes. See also byte  
and megabyte.  
L
level 2 cache: See cache.  
Light Emitting Diode (LED): A semiconductor device that emits light  
when a current is applied.  
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD): Liquid crystal sealed between two sheets  
of glass coated with transparent conducting material. The viewing-  
side coating is etched into character forming segments with leads  
that extend to the edge of the glass. Applying a voltage between the  
glass sheets alters the brightness of the liquid crystal.  
LSI: Large Scale Integration.  
1) A technology that allows the inclusion of up to 100,000 simple  
logic gates on a single chip.  
2) An integrated circuit that uses large scale integration.  
M
main board: See motherboard.  
megabyte (MB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 kilobytes. See also  
kilobyte.  
megahertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals 1 million cycles per  
second. See also hertz.  
menu: A software interface that displays a list of options on the screen.  
Also called a screen.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-9  
Glossary  
microprocessor: A hardware component contained in a single integrated  
circuit that carries out instructions. Also called the central  
processing unit (CPU), one of the main parts of the computer.  
mode: A method of operation, for example, the Boot Mode, Sleep Mode or  
the Hibernation Mode.  
monitor: A device that uses rows and columns of pixels to display  
alphanumeric characters or graphic images. See also CRT.  
motherboard: A name sometimes used to refer to the main printed circuit  
board in processing equipment. It usually contains integrated  
circuits that perform the processor’s basic functions and provides  
connectors for adding other boards that perform special functions.  
Sometimes called a main board.  
MP3: An audio compression standard that enables high-quality  
transmission and real-time playback of sound files.  
N
non-system disk: A formatted floppy diskette you can use to store  
programs and data but you cannot use to start the computer. See  
system disk.  
nonvolatile memory: Memory, usually read-only (ROM), that is capable of  
permanently storing information. Turning the computer’s power off  
does not alter data stored in nonvolatile memory.  
numeric keypad overlay: A feature that allows you to use certain keys on  
the keyboard to perform numeric entry, or to control cursor and page  
movement.  
O
OCR: Optical Character Recognition (reader). A technique or device that  
uses laser or visible light to identify characters and input them into a  
storage device.  
online state: A functional state of a peripheral device when it is ready to  
receive or transmit data.  
operating system: A group of programs that controls the basic operation  
of a computer. Operating system functions include interpreting  
programs, creating data files, and controlling the transmission and  
receipt (input/output) of data to and from memory and peripheral  
devices.  
output: The results of a computer operation. Output commonly indicates  
data.  
1) printed on paper, 2) displayed at a terminal, 3) sent through the  
serial port of internal modem, or 4) stored on some magnetic media.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-10  
Glossary  
P
parity: 1) The symmetrical relationship between two parameter values  
(integers) both of which are either on or off; odd or even; 0 or 1.  
2) In serial communications, an error detection bit that is added to a  
group of data bits making the sum of the bits even or odd. Parity can  
be set to none, odd, or even.  
password: A unique string of characters used to identify a specific user.  
The computer provides various levels of password protection such  
as user, supervisor and eject.  
pel: The smallest area of the display that can be addressed by software.  
Equal in size to a pixel or group of pixels. See pixel.  
peripheral component interconnect: An industry standard 32-bit bus.  
peripheral device: An I/O device that is external to the central processor  
and/or main memory such as a printer or a mouse.  
pixel: A picture element. The smallest dot that can be made on a display  
or printer. Also called a pel.  
plug and play: A capability with Windows that enables the system to  
automatically recognize connections of external devices and make  
the necessary configurations in the computer.  
port: The electrical connection through which the computer sends and  
receives data to and from devices or other computers.  
Power Saver: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for  
various power-saving functions.  
printed circuit board (PCB): A hardware component of a processor to  
which integrated circuits and other components are attached. The  
board itself is typically flat and rectangular, and constructed of  
fiberglass, to form the attachment surface.  
program: A set of instructions a computer can execute that enables it to  
achieve a desired result. See also application.  
prompt: A message the computer provides indicating it is ready for or  
requires information or an action from you.  
R
Radio frequency interference (RFI) shield: A metal shield enclosing the  
printed circuit boards of the printer or computer to prevent radio and  
TV interference. All computer equipment generates radio frequency  
signals. The FCC regulates the amount of signals a computing  
device can allow past its shielding. A Class A device is sufficient for  
office use. Class B provides a more stringent classification for home  
equipment use. TOSHIBA portable computers comply with Class B  
computing device regulations.  
Random Access Memory (RAM): High speed memory within the  
computer circuitry that can be read or written to.  
restart: Resetting a computer without turning it off (also called "warm boot"  
or "soft reset"). See also boot.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-11  
Glossary  
RGB: Red, green, and blue. A device that uses three input signals, each  
activating an electron gun for a primary additive color (red, green,  
and blue) or port for using such a device. See also CRT.  
RJ45: A modular LAN jack.  
ROM: Read Only Memory: A nonvolatile memory chip manufactured to  
contain information that controls the computer’s basic operation.  
You cannot access or change information stored in ROM.  
S
SCSI: Small Computer System Interface is an industry standard interface  
for connection of a variety of peripheral devices.  
SD/SDHC Card: Secure Digital cards are flash memory widely used in a  
variety of digital devices such as digital cameras and Personal  
Digital Assistants.  
serial communications: A communications technique that uses as few as  
two interconnecting wires to send bits one after another.  
serial interface: Refers to a type of information exchange that transmits  
information sequentially, one bit at a time.  
SIO: Serial Input/Output. The electronic methodology used in serial data  
transmission.  
soft key: Key combinations that emulate keys on the IBM keyboard,  
change some configuration options, stop program execution, and  
access the numeric keypad overlay.  
software: The set of programs, procedures and related documentation  
associated with a computer system. Specifically refers to computer  
programs that direct and control the computer system’s activities.  
See also hardware.  
stop bit: One or more bits of a byte that follow the transmitted character or  
group codes in asynchronous serial communications.  
subpixel: Three elements, one red, one green and blue (RGB), that make  
up a pixel on the color LCD. The computer sets subpixels  
independently, each may emit a different degree of brightness. See  
also pixel.  
synchronous: Having a constant time interval between successive bits,  
characters or events.  
system disk: A disk that has been formatted with an operating system.  
For MS-DOS the operating system is contained in two hidden files  
and the COMMAND.COM file. You can boot a computer using a  
system disk. Also called an operating system disk.  
T
terminal: A typewriter-like keyboard and CRT display screen connected to  
the computer for data input/output.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-12  
Glossary  
TFT display: A liquid crystal display (LCD) made from an array of liquid  
crystal cells using active-matrix technology with thin film transistor  
(TFT) to drive each cell.  
Touch Pad: A pointing device integrated into the TOSHIBA computer palm  
rest.  
TTL: Transistor-transistor logic. A logic circuit design that uses switching  
transistors for gates and storage.  
U
Universal Serial Bus: This serial interface lets you communicate with  
several devices connected in a chain to a single port on the  
computer.  
V
VGA: Video Graphics Array is an industry standard video adaptor that lets  
you run any popular software.  
volatile memory: Random access memory (RAM) that stores information  
as long as power is supplied to the computer.  
W
warm start: Restarting or resetting a computer without turning it off.  
window: A portion of the screen that can display its own application,  
document or dialog box. Often used to mean a Microsoft Windows  
window.  
Wireless LAN: Local Area Network (LAN) through wireless  
communication.  
write protection: A method for protecting a floppy diskette from accidental  
erasure.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-13  
Index  
DVD Super Multi drive  
location 2-4  
A
AC adaptor 3-2  
problems 8-11  
using 4-10  
writing 4-16  
additional 3-30  
connecting 1-4  
ASCII characters 5-7  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive  
location 2-4  
B
problems 8-10  
using 4-10  
BIOS Setup 7-8  
Battery  
writing 4-14  
charging 6-5  
Display 3-3  
extending life 6-7  
indicator 2-11, 6-2  
monitoring capacity 6-6  
real time clock 3-2, 6-4  
save mode 3-6  
automatic power off 3-5  
brightness down 5-4  
brightness up 5-4  
controller B-1  
hinges 2-9  
types 6-3  
opening 1-6  
screen 2-9  
Battery pack 2-8, 3-2  
additional 6-1  
Docking port 2-7  
Documentation list 1-1  
Dual Pointing Device  
AccuPoint 2-9, 4-2  
AccuPoint control buttons 2-9  
Touch Pad 2-9, 4-1, 8-15  
Touch Pad control buttons 2-9, 4-1  
using 4-1  
replacing 6-8  
Bluetooth 3-4, 4-30  
Bluetooth Stack for Windows by Toshiba  
3-11  
problems 8-22  
Boot Priority 7-3  
Bridge media slot 2-4, 3-15  
inserting 3-17  
removing 3-18  
E
C
Equipment checklist 1-1  
External monitor 2-6, 3-23  
problems 8-20  
CD-ROM 2-4  
CD-ROM drive 8-9  
Cleaning the computer 4-34  
Cooling vents 2-3  
F
FN + 1 (TOSHIBA Zooming Utility reduce)  
D
5-5  
FN + 2 (TOSHIBA Zooming Utility enlarge)  
5-5  
DC IN indicator 2-11, 6-3  
User’s Manual  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
FN + ENTER 5-3  
Mute 5-3  
FN + ESC (Mute) 5-3  
FN + F1 (Lock) 5-3  
Output 5-4  
Power Plan 5-3  
FN + F10 (Arrow mode) 5-3  
FN + F11 (Numeric mode) 5-3  
FN + F12 (ScrLock) 5-3  
FN + F2 (Power Plan) 5-3  
FN + F3 (Sleep) 5-4  
FN + F4 (Hibernate) 5-4  
FN + F5 (Output) 5-4  
FN + F6 (Brightness Down) 5-4  
FN + F7 (Brightness Up) 5-4  
FN + F8 (Wireless) 5-4  
FN + F9 (Touch Pad) 5-4  
FN + space (Zoom) 5-4  
Fingerprint Sensor  
Sleep 5-4  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (enlarge) 5-5  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (reduce) 5-5  
Touch Pad 5-4  
Wireless 5-4  
Zoom 5-4  
I
i.LINK 2-4  
connecting 3-27  
disconnecting 3-27  
precautions 3-26  
problems 8-21  
Indicators 2-11  
Media slot 2-11  
location 2-8  
problems 8-17  
K
using 4-3  
Floppy diskette care 4-22  
Function keys 5-2  
Keyboard 5-1  
FN Sticky key 5-5  
Function keys F1...F12 5-2  
Hot keys 5-3  
Windows special keys 5-5  
emulating enhanced keyboard 5-2  
problems 8-7  
G
Graphics controller 3-4  
H
HDD Protection 4-35  
HW Setup  
typewriter keys 5-1  
Boot priority 7-3  
CPU 7-5  
Keypad overlay 3-6  
Arrow mode 5-6  
LAN 7-6  
Numeric mode 5-6  
USB 7-7  
accessing 7-1  
temporarily using normal keyboard  
(overlay on) 5-6  
device config 7-6  
display 7-2  
temporarily using overlay (overlay off)  
5-7  
general 7-2  
turning on the overlays 5-5  
keyboard 7-5  
window 7-1  
L
LAN 3-4, 4-32  
Hard Disk Drive indicator 2-11  
Hard disk drive 3-3  
automatic power off 3-5  
Heat dispersal 3-7, 4-37  
Hibernation Mode 3-7  
Hot keys 3-5  
Link indicator 2-6  
active indicator 2-6  
cable types 4-32  
connecting 4-33  
disconnecting 4-34  
jack 2-6  
Brightness Down 5-4  
Brightness Up 5-4  
Hibernate 5-4  
problems 8-22  
M
Media 2-11  
Lock 5-3  
User’s Manual  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Media care 4-22  
CD/DVDs 4-22  
Floppy diskettes 4-22  
Memory 3-2  
Additional memory module 8-18  
Analyzing the problem 8-2  
Battery 8-5  
Bluetooth 8-22  
additional 3-30  
installing 3-20  
problems 8-18  
removing 3-22  
DVD Super Multi drive 8-11  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive 8-10  
Dual Pointing device 8-15  
External monitor 8-20  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory  
Stick PRO Duo 3-17  
problems 8-14  
Fingerprint Sensor 8-17  
Hard disk drive 8-8  
Hardware and system checklist 8-3  
Internal display panel 8-8  
Keyboard 8-7  
Modem 3-4  
connecting 4-27  
disconnecting 4-28  
jack 2-5  
problems 8-21  
LAN 8-22  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/  
Memory Stick PRO Duo 8-14  
Modem 8-21  
MultiMediaCard 8-14  
Overheating power down 8-4  
PC Card 8-13  
properties menu 4-26  
region selection 4-26  
Moving the computer 4-34  
MultiMediaCard  
problems 8-14  
Password 8-7  
Power 8-4  
P
Real Time Clock 8-7  
SD/SDHC Card 8-13  
Self test 8-4  
Sound system 8-19  
System start-up 8-4  
TOSHIBA support 8-24  
Touch Pad 8-15  
USB device 8-18  
USB floppy diskette drive 8-12  
USB mouse 8-16  
PC Card 3-13  
inserting 3-13  
problems 8-13  
removing 3-14  
Password  
Starting the computer by 6-12  
Supervisor 6-12  
power on 3-6  
problems 8-7  
user 6-10  
Wireless LAN 8-22  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device 8-21  
xD picture card 8-14  
Pointing Device  
Touch Pad location 2-8  
Power  
Processor 3-1  
Hibernation Mode 1-10  
Shut Down mode (Boot Mode) 1-7  
Sleep Mode 1-8  
System Auto Off 6-13  
conditions 6-1  
R
Recovery Discs 1-15  
Recovery hard disk drive 1-14  
Restarting the computer 1-11  
indicators 6-2  
panel on/off 3-6, 6-13  
turning off 1-7  
S
SD/SDHC Card  
formatting 3-17  
problems 8-13  
Security lock 3-29  
location 2-5  
turning on 1-7  
Problems  
AC power 8-5  
User’s Manual  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TECRA A9/ TECRA S5/ TECRA P5/ Satellite Pro S200  
Serial port 3-28  
Sleep Mode  
System automatic 3-6  
setting 1-8  
Soft keys  
X
xD picture card  
problems 8-14  
ENTER 5-3  
ScrLock 5-3  
enhanced keyboard 5-2  
Sound system  
Stereo speakers 2-9  
headphone jack 2-2  
microphone 2-2  
microphone jack 2-2  
problems 8-19  
volume control dial 2-2  
T
TOSHIBA Assist 3-11  
TOSHIBA Assist button 3-5  
TOSHIBA ConfigFree 3-11  
TOSHIBA DVD-RAM Utility 3-12  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator 3-11, 4-20  
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator 3-30  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection 3-7  
TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool 3-8  
TOSHIBA Presentation button 3-5  
TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility 3-11  
TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format 3-11  
TOSHIBA Value Added Package 3-8  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility 3-8  
U
USB FDD Kit 3-24  
USB device  
problems 8-18  
USB floppy diskette drive  
problems 8-12  
V
Video RAM 3-2  
Volume control dial 2-2  
W
Windows Mobility Center 3-12  
Wireless LAN 3-5, 4-29  
problems 8-22  
Wireless communication 4-29  
indicator 2-11, 4-32  
Wireless communication switch 2-2, 4-31  
User’s Manual  
Index-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Texas Instruments Computer Drive TMS320F20x F24x DSP User Manual
Toshiba DVD VCR Combo SD V65HTSU User Manual
Toshiba Flat Panel Television 65H85C User Manual
Tripp Lite Power Supply UL2601 1 User Manual
Viking Cooktop VGCC530 4B User Manual
Vivotek Webcam VS8100 User Manual
Wagner SprayTech Lawn Mower Accessory 279017 User Manual
Wayne Dalton Network Card WDSF 10 User Manual
Weber Burner 42377 User Manual
Weed Eater Lawn Mower Accessory 960 73 00 31 User Manual